]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispref/display.texi
Merge from origin/emacs-25
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispref / display.texi
1 @c -*- mode: texinfo; coding: utf-8 -*-
2 @c This is part of the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
3 @c Copyright (C) 1990-1995, 1998-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @c See the file elisp.texi for copying conditions.
5 @node Display
6 @chapter Emacs Display
7
8 This chapter describes a number of features related to the display
9 that Emacs presents to the user.
10
11 @menu
12 * Refresh Screen:: Clearing the screen and redrawing everything on it.
13 * Forcing Redisplay:: Forcing redisplay.
14 * Truncation:: Folding or wrapping long text lines.
15 * The Echo Area:: Displaying messages at the bottom of the screen.
16 * Warnings:: Displaying warning messages for the user.
17 * Invisible Text:: Hiding part of the buffer text.
18 * Selective Display:: Hiding part of the buffer text (the old way).
19 * Temporary Displays:: Displays that go away automatically.
20 * Overlays:: Use overlays to highlight parts of the buffer.
21 * Size of Displayed Text:: How large displayed text is.
22 * Line Height:: Controlling the height of lines.
23 * Faces:: A face defines a graphics style for text characters:
24 font, colors, etc.
25 * Fringes:: Controlling window fringes.
26 * Scroll Bars:: Controlling scroll bars.
27 * Window Dividers:: Separating windows visually.
28 * Display Property:: Enabling special display features.
29 * Images:: Displaying images in Emacs buffers.
30 * Xwidgets:: Displaying native widgets in Emacs buffers.
31 * Buttons:: Adding clickable buttons to Emacs buffers.
32 * Abstract Display:: Emacs's Widget for Object Collections.
33 * Blinking:: How Emacs shows the matching open parenthesis.
34 * Character Display:: How Emacs displays individual characters.
35 * Beeping:: Audible signal to the user.
36 * Window Systems:: Which window system is being used.
37 * Tooltips:: Tooltip display in Emacs.
38 * Bidirectional Display:: Display of bidirectional scripts, such as
39 Arabic and Farsi.
40 @end menu
41
42 @node Refresh Screen
43 @section Refreshing the Screen
44 @cindex refresh the screen
45 @cindex screen refresh
46
47 The function @code{redraw-frame} clears and redisplays the entire
48 contents of a given frame (@pxref{Frames}). This is useful if the
49 screen is corrupted.
50
51 @defun redraw-frame &optional frame
52 This function clears and redisplays frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame}
53 is omitted or nil, it redraws the selected frame.
54 @end defun
55
56 Even more powerful is @code{redraw-display}:
57
58 @deffn Command redraw-display
59 This function clears and redisplays all visible frames.
60 @end deffn
61
62 In Emacs, processing user input takes priority over redisplay. If
63 you call these functions when input is available, they don't redisplay
64 immediately, but the requested redisplay does happen
65 eventually---after all the input has been processed.
66
67 On text terminals, suspending and resuming Emacs normally also
68 refreshes the screen. Some terminal emulators record separate
69 contents for display-oriented programs such as Emacs and for ordinary
70 sequential display. If you are using such a terminal, you might want
71 to inhibit the redisplay on resumption.
72
73 @defopt no-redraw-on-reenter
74 @cindex suspend (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
75 @cindex resume (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
76 This variable controls whether Emacs redraws the entire screen after it
77 has been suspended and resumed. Non-@code{nil} means there is no need
78 to redraw, @code{nil} means redrawing is needed. The default is @code{nil}.
79 @end defopt
80
81 @node Forcing Redisplay
82 @section Forcing Redisplay
83 @cindex forcing redisplay
84
85 Emacs normally tries to redisplay the screen whenever it waits for
86 input. With the following function, you can request an immediate
87 attempt to redisplay, in the middle of Lisp code, without actually
88 waiting for input.
89
90 @defun redisplay &optional force
91 This function tries immediately to redisplay. The optional argument
92 @var{force}, if non-@code{nil}, forces the redisplay to be performed,
93 instead of being preempted if input is pending.
94
95 The function returns @code{t} if it actually tried to redisplay, and
96 @code{nil} otherwise. A value of @code{t} does not mean that
97 redisplay proceeded to completion; it could have been preempted by
98 newly arriving input.
99 @end defun
100
101 Although @code{redisplay} tries immediately to redisplay, it does
102 not change how Emacs decides which parts of its frame(s) to redisplay.
103 By contrast, the following function adds certain windows to the
104 pending redisplay work (as if their contents had completely changed),
105 but does not immediately try to perform redisplay.
106
107 @defun force-window-update &optional object
108 This function forces some or all windows to be updated the next time
109 Emacs does a redisplay. If @var{object} is a window, that window is
110 to be updated. If @var{object} is a buffer or buffer name, all
111 windows displaying that buffer are to be updated. If @var{object} is
112 @code{nil} (or omitted), all windows are to be updated.
113
114 This function does not do a redisplay immediately; Emacs does that as
115 it waits for input, or when the function @code{redisplay} is called.
116 @end defun
117
118 @defvar pre-redisplay-function
119 A function run just before redisplay. It is called with one argument,
120 the set of windows to be redisplayed. The set can be @code{nil},
121 meaning only the selected window, or @code{t}, meaning all the
122 windows.
123 @end defvar
124
125 @defvar pre-redisplay-functions
126 This hook is run just before redisplay. It is called once in each
127 window that is about to be redisplayed, with @code{current-buffer} set
128 to the buffer displayed in that window.
129 @end defvar
130
131 @node Truncation
132 @section Truncation
133 @cindex line wrapping
134 @cindex line truncation
135 @cindex continuation lines
136 @cindex @samp{$} in display
137 @cindex @samp{\} in display
138
139 When a line of text extends beyond the right edge of a window, Emacs
140 can @dfn{continue} the line (make it wrap to the next screen
141 line), or @dfn{truncate} the line (limit it to one screen line). The
142 additional screen lines used to display a long text line are called
143 @dfn{continuation} lines. Continuation is not the same as filling;
144 continuation happens on the screen only, not in the buffer contents,
145 and it breaks a line precisely at the right margin, not at a word
146 boundary. @xref{Filling}.
147
148 On a graphical display, tiny arrow images in the window fringes
149 indicate truncated and continued lines (@pxref{Fringes}). On a text
150 terminal, a @samp{$} in the rightmost column of the window indicates
151 truncation; a @samp{\} on the rightmost column indicates a line that
152 wraps. (The display table can specify alternate characters to use
153 for this; @pxref{Display Tables}).
154
155 @defopt truncate-lines
156 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, lines that extend
157 beyond the right edge of the window are truncated; otherwise, they are
158 continued. As a special exception, the variable
159 @code{truncate-partial-width-windows} takes precedence in
160 @dfn{partial-width} windows (i.e., windows that do not occupy the
161 entire frame width).
162 @end defopt
163
164 @defopt truncate-partial-width-windows
165 @cindex partial-width windows
166 This variable controls line truncation in @dfn{partial-width} windows.
167 A partial-width window is one that does not occupy the entire frame
168 width (@pxref{Splitting Windows}). If the value is @code{nil}, line
169 truncation is determined by the variable @code{truncate-lines} (see
170 above). If the value is an integer @var{n}, lines are truncated if
171 the partial-width window has fewer than @var{n} columns, regardless of
172 the value of @code{truncate-lines}; if the partial-width window has
173 @var{n} or more columns, line truncation is determined by
174 @code{truncate-lines}. For any other non-@code{nil} value, lines are
175 truncated in every partial-width window, regardless of the value of
176 @code{truncate-lines}.
177 @end defopt
178
179 When horizontal scrolling (@pxref{Horizontal Scrolling}) is in use in
180 a window, that forces truncation.
181
182 @defvar wrap-prefix
183 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
184 @dfn{wrap prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
185 continuation line. (If lines are truncated, @code{wrap-prefix} is
186 never used.) Its value may be a string or an image (@pxref{Other
187 Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
188 @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties (@pxref{Specified
189 Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way as a @code{display}
190 text property. @xref{Display Property}.
191
192 A wrap prefix may also be specified for regions of text, using the
193 @code{wrap-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
194 over the @code{wrap-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
195 @end defvar
196
197 @defvar line-prefix
198 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
199 @dfn{line prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
200 non-continuation line. Its value may be a string or an image
201 (@pxref{Other Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as
202 specified by the @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties
203 (@pxref{Specified Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way
204 as a @code{display} text property. @xref{Display Property}.
205
206 A line prefix may also be specified for regions of text using the
207 @code{line-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
208 over the @code{line-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
209 @end defvar
210
211 @ignore
212 If your buffer contains only very short lines, you might find it
213 advisable to set @code{cache-long-scans} to @code{nil}.
214
215 @defvar cache-long-scans
216 If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default), various indentation
217 and motion functions, and Emacs redisplay, cache the results of
218 scanning the buffer, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning regions
219 of the buffer unless they are modified.
220
221 Turning off the cache speeds up processing of short lines somewhat.
222
223 This variable is automatically buffer-local in every buffer.
224 @end defvar
225 @end ignore
226
227 @node The Echo Area
228 @section The Echo Area
229 @cindex error display
230 @cindex echo area
231
232 @c FIXME: Why not use @xref{Minibuffers} directly? --xfq
233 The @dfn{echo area} is used for displaying error messages
234 (@pxref{Errors}), for messages made with the @code{message} primitive,
235 and for echoing keystrokes. It is not the same as the minibuffer,
236 despite the fact that the minibuffer appears (when active) in the same
237 place on the screen as the echo area. @xref{Minibuffer,, The
238 Minibuffer, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
239
240 Apart from the functions documented in this section, you can print
241 Lisp objects to the echo area by specifying @code{t} as the output
242 stream. @xref{Output Streams}.
243
244 @menu
245 * Displaying Messages:: Explicitly displaying text in the echo area.
246 * Progress:: Informing user about progress of a long operation.
247 * Logging Messages:: Echo area messages are logged for the user.
248 * Echo Area Customization:: Controlling the echo area.
249 @end menu
250
251 @node Displaying Messages
252 @subsection Displaying Messages in the Echo Area
253 @cindex display message in echo area
254
255 This section describes the standard functions for displaying
256 messages in the echo area.
257
258 @defun message format-string &rest arguments
259 This function displays a message in the echo area.
260 @var{format-string} is a format string, and @var{arguments} are the
261 objects for its format specifications, like in the @code{format-message}
262 function (@pxref{Formatting Strings}). The resulting formatted string
263 is displayed in the echo area; if it contains @code{face} text
264 properties, it is displayed with the specified faces (@pxref{Faces}).
265 The string is also added to the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but without
266 text properties (@pxref{Logging Messages}).
267
268 In a format string containing single quotes, curved quotes @t{‘like
269 this’} and grave quotes @t{`like this'} work better than straight
270 quotes @t{'like this'}, as @code{message} typically formats every
271 straight quote as a curved closing quote.
272
273 In batch mode, the message is printed to the standard error stream,
274 followed by a newline.
275
276 When @code{inhibit-message} is non-@code{nil}, no message will be displayed
277 in the echo area, it will only be logged to @samp{*Messages*}.
278
279 If @var{format-string} is @code{nil} or the empty string,
280 @code{message} clears the echo area; if the echo area has been
281 expanded automatically, this brings it back to its normal size. If
282 the minibuffer is active, this brings the minibuffer contents back
283 onto the screen immediately.
284
285 @example
286 @group
287 (message "Reverting `%s'..." (buffer-name))
288 @print{} Reverting ‘subr.el’...
289 @result{} "Reverting ‘subr.el’..."
290 @end group
291
292 @group
293 ---------- Echo Area ----------
294 Reverting ‘subr.el’...
295 ---------- Echo Area ----------
296 @end group
297 @end example
298
299 To automatically display a message in the echo area or in a pop-buffer,
300 depending on its size, use @code{display-message-or-buffer} (see below).
301
302 @strong{Warning:} If you want to use your own string as a message
303 verbatim, don't just write @code{(message @var{string})}. If
304 @var{string} contains @samp{%}, @samp{`}, or @samp{'} it may be
305 reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use @code{(message
306 "%s" @var{string})}.
307 @end defun
308
309 @defvar inhibit-message
310 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{message} and related functions
311 will not use the Echo Area to display messages.
312 @end defvar
313
314 @defmac with-temp-message message &rest body
315 This construct displays a message in the echo area temporarily, during
316 the execution of @var{body}. It displays @var{message}, executes
317 @var{body}, then returns the value of the last body form while restoring
318 the previous echo area contents.
319 @end defmac
320
321 @defun message-or-box format-string &rest arguments
322 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but may display it
323 in a dialog box instead of the echo area. If this function is called in
324 a command that was invoked using the mouse---more precisely, if
325 @code{last-nonmenu-event} (@pxref{Command Loop Info}) is either
326 @code{nil} or a list---then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to
327 display the message. Otherwise, it uses the echo area. (This is the
328 same criterion that @code{y-or-n-p} uses to make a similar decision; see
329 @ref{Yes-or-No Queries}.)
330
331 You can force use of the mouse or of the echo area by binding
332 @code{last-nonmenu-event} to a suitable value around the call.
333 @end defun
334
335 @defun message-box format-string &rest arguments
336 @anchor{message-box}
337 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but uses a dialog
338 box (or a pop-up menu) whenever that is possible. If it is impossible
339 to use a dialog box or pop-up menu, because the terminal does not
340 support them, then @code{message-box} uses the echo area, like
341 @code{message}.
342 @end defun
343
344 @defun display-message-or-buffer message &optional buffer-name action frame
345 This function displays the message @var{message}, which may be either a
346 string or a buffer. If it is shorter than the maximum height of the
347 echo area, as defined by @code{max-mini-window-height}, it is displayed
348 in the echo area, using @code{message}. Otherwise,
349 @code{display-buffer} is used to show it in a pop-up buffer.
350
351 Returns either the string shown in the echo area, or when a pop-up
352 buffer is used, the window used to display it.
353
354 If @var{message} is a string, then the optional argument
355 @var{buffer-name} is the name of the buffer used to display it when a
356 pop-up buffer is used, defaulting to @file{*Message*}. In the case
357 where @var{message} is a string and displayed in the echo area, it is
358 not specified whether the contents are inserted into the buffer anyway.
359
360 The optional arguments @var{action} and @var{frame} are as for
361 @code{display-buffer}, and only used if a buffer is displayed.
362 @end defun
363
364 @defun current-message
365 This function returns the message currently being displayed in the
366 echo area, or @code{nil} if there is none.
367 @end defun
368
369 @node Progress
370 @subsection Reporting Operation Progress
371 @cindex progress reporting
372
373 When an operation can take a while to finish, you should inform the
374 user about the progress it makes. This way the user can estimate
375 remaining time and clearly see that Emacs is busy working, not hung.
376 A convenient way to do this is to use a @dfn{progress reporter}.
377
378 Here is a working example that does nothing useful:
379
380 @smallexample
381 (let ((progress-reporter
382 (make-progress-reporter "Collecting mana for Emacs..."
383 0 500)))
384 (dotimes (k 500)
385 (sit-for 0.01)
386 (progress-reporter-update progress-reporter k))
387 (progress-reporter-done progress-reporter))
388 @end smallexample
389
390 @defun make-progress-reporter message &optional min-value max-value current-value min-change min-time
391 This function creates and returns a progress reporter object, which
392 you will use as an argument for the other functions listed below. The
393 idea is to precompute as much data as possible to make progress
394 reporting very fast.
395
396 When this progress reporter is subsequently used, it will display
397 @var{message} in the echo area, followed by progress percentage.
398 @var{message} is treated as a simple string. If you need it to depend
399 on a filename, for instance, use @code{format-message} before calling this
400 function.
401
402 The arguments @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} should be numbers
403 standing for the starting and final states of the operation. For
404 instance, an operation that scans a buffer should set these to the
405 results of @code{point-min} and @code{point-max} correspondingly.
406 @var{max-value} should be greater than @var{min-value}.
407
408 Alternatively, you can set @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} to
409 @code{nil}. In that case, the progress reporter does not report
410 process percentages; it instead displays a ``spinner'' that rotates a
411 notch each time you update the progress reporter.
412
413 If @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} are numbers, you can give the
414 argument @var{current-value} a numerical value specifying the initial
415 progress; if omitted, this defaults to @var{min-value}.
416
417 The remaining arguments control the rate of echo area updates. The
418 progress reporter will wait for at least @var{min-change} more
419 percents of the operation to be completed before printing next
420 message; the default is one percent. @var{min-time} specifies the
421 minimum time in seconds to pass between successive prints; the default
422 is 0.2 seconds. (On some operating systems, the progress reporter may
423 handle fractions of seconds with varying precision).
424
425 This function calls @code{progress-reporter-update}, so the first
426 message is printed immediately.
427 @end defun
428
429 @defun progress-reporter-update reporter &optional value
430 This function does the main work of reporting progress of your
431 operation. It displays the message of @var{reporter}, followed by
432 progress percentage determined by @var{value}. If percentage is zero,
433 or close enough according to the @var{min-change} and @var{min-time}
434 arguments, then it is omitted from the output.
435
436 @var{reporter} must be the result of a call to
437 @code{make-progress-reporter}. @var{value} specifies the current
438 state of your operation and must be between @var{min-value} and
439 @var{max-value} (inclusive) as passed to
440 @code{make-progress-reporter}. For instance, if you scan a buffer,
441 then @var{value} should be the result of a call to @code{point}.
442
443 This function respects @var{min-change} and @var{min-time} as passed
444 to @code{make-progress-reporter} and so does not output new messages
445 on every invocation. It is thus very fast and normally you should not
446 try to reduce the number of calls to it: resulting overhead will most
447 likely negate your effort.
448 @end defun
449
450 @defun progress-reporter-force-update reporter &optional value new-message
451 This function is similar to @code{progress-reporter-update} except
452 that it prints a message in the echo area unconditionally.
453
454 The first two arguments have the same meaning as for
455 @code{progress-reporter-update}. Optional @var{new-message} allows
456 you to change the message of the @var{reporter}. Since this function
457 always updates the echo area, such a change will be immediately
458 presented to the user.
459 @end defun
460
461 @defun progress-reporter-done reporter
462 This function should be called when the operation is finished. It
463 prints the message of @var{reporter} followed by word @samp{done} in the
464 echo area.
465
466 You should always call this function and not hope for
467 @code{progress-reporter-update} to print @samp{100%}. Firstly, it may
468 never print it, there are many good reasons for this not to happen.
469 Secondly, @samp{done} is more explicit.
470 @end defun
471
472 @defmac dotimes-with-progress-reporter (var count [result]) message body@dots{}
473 This is a convenience macro that works the same way as @code{dotimes}
474 does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
475 above. It allows you to save some typing.
476
477 You can rewrite the example in the beginning of this node using
478 this macro this way:
479
480 @example
481 (dotimes-with-progress-reporter
482 (k 500)
483 "Collecting some mana for Emacs..."
484 (sit-for 0.01))
485 @end example
486 @end defmac
487
488 @node Logging Messages
489 @subsection Logging Messages in @file{*Messages*}
490 @cindex logging echo-area messages
491
492 Almost all the messages displayed in the echo area are also recorded
493 in the @file{*Messages*} buffer so that the user can refer back to
494 them. This includes all the messages that are output with
495 @code{message}. By default, this buffer is read-only and uses the major
496 mode @code{messages-buffer-mode}. Nothing prevents the user from
497 killing the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but the next display of a message
498 recreates it. Any Lisp code that needs to access the
499 @file{*Messages*} buffer directly and wants to ensure that it exists
500 should use the function @code{messages-buffer}.
501
502 @defun messages-buffer
503 This function returns the @file{*Messages*} buffer. If it does not
504 exist, it creates it, and switches it to @code{messages-buffer-mode}.
505 @end defun
506
507 @defopt message-log-max
508 This variable specifies how many lines to keep in the @file{*Messages*}
509 buffer. The value @code{t} means there is no limit on how many lines to
510 keep. The value @code{nil} disables message logging entirely. Here's
511 how to display a message and prevent it from being logged:
512
513 @example
514 (let (message-log-max)
515 (message @dots{}))
516 @end example
517 @end defopt
518
519 To make @file{*Messages*} more convenient for the user, the logging
520 facility combines successive identical messages. It also combines
521 successive related messages for the sake of two cases: question
522 followed by answer, and a series of progress messages.
523
524 A question followed by an answer has two messages like the
525 ones produced by @code{y-or-n-p}: the first is @samp{@var{question}},
526 and the second is @samp{@var{question}...@var{answer}}. The first
527 message conveys no additional information beyond what's in the second,
528 so logging the second message discards the first from the log.
529
530 A series of progress messages has successive messages like
531 those produced by @code{make-progress-reporter}. They have the form
532 @samp{@var{base}...@var{how-far}}, where @var{base} is the same each
533 time, while @var{how-far} varies. Logging each message in the series
534 discards the previous one, provided they are consecutive.
535
536 The functions @code{make-progress-reporter} and @code{y-or-n-p}
537 don't have to do anything special to activate the message log
538 combination feature. It operates whenever two consecutive messages
539 are logged that share a common prefix ending in @samp{...}.
540
541 @node Echo Area Customization
542 @subsection Echo Area Customization
543 @cindex echo area customization
544
545 These variables control details of how the echo area works.
546
547 @defvar cursor-in-echo-area
548 This variable controls where the cursor appears when a message is
549 displayed in the echo area. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the cursor
550 appears at the end of the message. Otherwise, the cursor appears at
551 point---not in the echo area at all.
552
553 The value is normally @code{nil}; Lisp programs bind it to @code{t}
554 for brief periods of time.
555 @end defvar
556
557 @defvar echo-area-clear-hook
558 This normal hook is run whenever the echo area is cleared---either by
559 @code{(message nil)} or for any other reason.
560 @end defvar
561
562 @defopt echo-keystrokes
563 This variable determines how much time should elapse before command
564 characters echo. Its value must be a number, and specifies the
565 number of seconds to wait before echoing. If the user types a prefix
566 key (such as @kbd{C-x}) and then delays this many seconds before
567 continuing, the prefix key is echoed in the echo area. (Once echoing
568 begins in a key sequence, all subsequent characters in the same key
569 sequence are echoed immediately.)
570
571 If the value is zero, then command input is not echoed.
572 @end defopt
573
574 @defvar message-truncate-lines
575 Normally, displaying a long message resizes the echo area to display
576 the entire message. But if the variable @code{message-truncate-lines}
577 is non-@code{nil}, the echo area does not resize, and the message is
578 truncated to fit it.
579 @end defvar
580
581 The variable @code{max-mini-window-height}, which specifies the
582 maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows, also applies to the
583 echo area (which is really a special use of the minibuffer window;
584 @pxref{Minibuffer Misc}).
585
586 @node Warnings
587 @section Reporting Warnings
588 @cindex warnings
589
590 @dfn{Warnings} are a facility for a program to inform the user of a
591 possible problem, but continue running.
592
593 @menu
594 * Warning Basics:: Warnings concepts and functions to report them.
595 * Warning Variables:: Variables programs bind to customize their warnings.
596 * Warning Options:: Variables users set to control display of warnings.
597 * Delayed Warnings:: Deferring a warning until the end of a command.
598 @end menu
599
600 @node Warning Basics
601 @subsection Warning Basics
602 @cindex severity level
603
604 Every warning has a textual message, which explains the problem for
605 the user, and a @dfn{severity level} which is a symbol. Here are the
606 possible severity levels, in order of decreasing severity, and their
607 meanings:
608
609 @table @code
610 @item :emergency
611 A problem that will seriously impair Emacs operation soon
612 if you do not attend to it promptly.
613 @item :error
614 A report of data or circumstances that are inherently wrong.
615 @item :warning
616 A report of data or circumstances that are not inherently wrong, but
617 raise suspicion of a possible problem.
618 @item :debug
619 A report of information that may be useful if you are debugging.
620 @end table
621
622 When your program encounters invalid input data, it can either
623 signal a Lisp error by calling @code{error} or @code{signal} or report
624 a warning with severity @code{:error}. Signaling a Lisp error is the
625 easiest thing to do, but it means the program cannot continue
626 processing. If you want to take the trouble to implement a way to
627 continue processing despite the bad data, then reporting a warning of
628 severity @code{:error} is the right way to inform the user of the
629 problem. For instance, the Emacs Lisp byte compiler can report an
630 error that way and continue compiling other functions. (If the
631 program signals a Lisp error and then handles it with
632 @code{condition-case}, the user won't see the error message; it could
633 show the message to the user by reporting it as a warning.)
634
635 @c FIXME: Why use "(bytecomp)" instead of "'bytecomp" or simply
636 @c "bytecomp" here? The parens are part of warning-type-format but
637 @c not part of the warning type. --xfq
638 @cindex warning type
639 Each warning has a @dfn{warning type} to classify it. The type is a
640 list of symbols. The first symbol should be the custom group that you
641 use for the program's user options. For example, byte compiler
642 warnings use the warning type @code{(bytecomp)}. You can also
643 subcategorize the warnings, if you wish, by using more symbols in the
644 list.
645
646 @defun display-warning type message &optional level buffer-name
647 This function reports a warning, using @var{message} as the message
648 and @var{type} as the warning type. @var{level} should be the
649 severity level, with @code{:warning} being the default.
650
651 @var{buffer-name}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the name of the buffer
652 for logging the warning. By default, it is @file{*Warnings*}.
653 @end defun
654
655 @defun lwarn type level message &rest args
656 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
657 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message in the @file{*Warnings*}
658 buffer. In other respects it is equivalent to @code{display-warning}.
659 @end defun
660
661 @defun warn message &rest args
662 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
663 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message, @code{(emacs)} as the
664 type, and @code{:warning} as the severity level. It exists for
665 compatibility only; we recommend not using it, because you should
666 specify a specific warning type.
667 @end defun
668
669 @node Warning Variables
670 @subsection Warning Variables
671 @cindex warning variables
672
673 Programs can customize how their warnings appear by binding
674 the variables described in this section.
675
676 @defvar warning-levels
677 This list defines the meaning and severity order of the warning
678 severity levels. Each element defines one severity level,
679 and they are arranged in order of decreasing severity.
680
681 Each element has the form @code{(@var{level} @var{string}
682 @var{function})}, where @var{level} is the severity level it defines.
683 @var{string} specifies the textual description of this level.
684 @var{string} should use @samp{%s} to specify where to put the warning
685 type information, or it can omit the @samp{%s} so as not to include
686 that information.
687
688 The optional @var{function}, if non-@code{nil}, is a function to call
689 with no arguments, to get the user's attention.
690
691 Normally you should not change the value of this variable.
692 @end defvar
693
694 @defvar warning-prefix-function
695 If non-@code{nil}, the value is a function to generate prefix text for
696 warnings. Programs can bind the variable to a suitable function.
697 @code{display-warning} calls this function with the warnings buffer
698 current, and the function can insert text in it. That text becomes
699 the beginning of the warning message.
700
701 The function is called with two arguments, the severity level and its
702 entry in @code{warning-levels}. It should return a list to use as the
703 entry (this value need not be an actual member of
704 @code{warning-levels}). By constructing this value, the function can
705 change the severity of the warning, or specify different handling for
706 a given severity level.
707
708 If the variable's value is @code{nil} then there is no function
709 to call.
710 @end defvar
711
712 @defvar warning-series
713 Programs can bind this variable to @code{t} to say that the next
714 warning should begin a series. When several warnings form a series,
715 that means to leave point on the first warning of the series, rather
716 than keep moving it for each warning so that it appears on the last one.
717 The series ends when the local binding is unbound and
718 @code{warning-series} becomes @code{nil} again.
719
720 The value can also be a symbol with a function definition. That is
721 equivalent to @code{t}, except that the next warning will also call
722 the function with no arguments with the warnings buffer current. The
723 function can insert text which will serve as a header for the series
724 of warnings.
725
726 Once a series has begun, the value is a marker which points to the
727 buffer position in the warnings buffer of the start of the series.
728
729 The variable's normal value is @code{nil}, which means to handle
730 each warning separately.
731 @end defvar
732
733 @defvar warning-fill-prefix
734 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a fill prefix to
735 use for filling each warning's text.
736 @end defvar
737
738 @defvar warning-type-format
739 This variable specifies the format for displaying the warning type
740 in the warning message. The result of formatting the type this way
741 gets included in the message under the control of the string in the
742 entry in @code{warning-levels}. The default value is @code{" (%s)"}.
743 If you bind it to @code{""} then the warning type won't appear at
744 all.
745 @end defvar
746
747 @node Warning Options
748 @subsection Warning Options
749 @cindex warning options
750
751 These variables are used by users to control what happens
752 when a Lisp program reports a warning.
753
754 @defopt warning-minimum-level
755 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
756 shown immediately to the user. The default is @code{:warning}, which
757 means to immediately display all warnings except @code{:debug}
758 warnings.
759 @end defopt
760
761 @defopt warning-minimum-log-level
762 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
763 logged in the warnings buffer. The default is @code{:warning}, which
764 means to log all warnings except @code{:debug} warnings.
765 @end defopt
766
767 @defopt warning-suppress-types
768 This list specifies which warning types should not be displayed
769 immediately for the user. Each element of the list should be a list
770 of symbols. If its elements match the first elements in a warning
771 type, then that warning is not displayed immediately.
772 @end defopt
773
774 @defopt warning-suppress-log-types
775 This list specifies which warning types should not be logged in the
776 warnings buffer. Each element of the list should be a list of
777 symbols. If it matches the first few elements in a warning type, then
778 that warning is not logged.
779 @end defopt
780
781 @node Delayed Warnings
782 @subsection Delayed Warnings
783 @cindex delayed warnings
784
785 Sometimes, you may wish to avoid showing a warning while a command is
786 running, and only show it only after the end of the command. You can
787 use the variable @code{delayed-warnings-list} for this.
788
789 @defvar delayed-warnings-list
790 The value of this variable is a list of warnings to be displayed after
791 the current command has finished. Each element must be a list
792
793 @smallexample
794 (@var{type} @var{message} [@var{level} [@var{buffer-name}]])
795 @end smallexample
796
797 @noindent
798 with the same form, and the same meanings, as the argument list of
799 @code{display-warning} (@pxref{Warning Basics}). Immediately after
800 running @code{post-command-hook} (@pxref{Command Overview}), the Emacs
801 command loop displays all the warnings specified by this variable,
802 then resets it to @code{nil}.
803 @end defvar
804
805 Programs which need to further customize the delayed warnings
806 mechanism can change the variable @code{delayed-warnings-hook}:
807
808 @defvar delayed-warnings-hook
809 This is a normal hook which is run by the Emacs command loop, after
810 @code{post-command-hook}, in order to to process and display delayed
811 warnings.
812
813 Its default value is a list of two functions:
814
815 @smallexample
816 (collapse-delayed-warnings display-delayed-warnings)
817 @end smallexample
818
819 @findex collapse-delayed-warnings
820 @findex display-delayed-warnings
821 @noindent
822 The function @code{collapse-delayed-warnings} removes repeated entries
823 from @code{delayed-warnings-list}. The function
824 @code{display-delayed-warnings} calls @code{display-warning} on each
825 of the entries in @code{delayed-warnings-list}, in turn, and then sets
826 @code{delayed-warnings-list} to @code{nil}.
827 @end defvar
828
829 @node Invisible Text
830 @section Invisible Text
831
832 @cindex invisible text
833 You can make characters @dfn{invisible}, so that they do not appear on
834 the screen, with the @code{invisible} property. This can be either a
835 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}) or an overlay property
836 (@pxref{Overlays}). Cursor motion also partly ignores these
837 characters; if the command loop finds that point is inside a range of
838 invisible text after a command, it relocates point to the other side
839 of the text.
840
841 In the simplest case, any non-@code{nil} @code{invisible} property makes
842 a character invisible. This is the default case---if you don't alter
843 the default value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}, this is how the
844 @code{invisible} property works. You should normally use @code{t}
845 as the value of the @code{invisible} property if you don't plan
846 to set @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} yourself.
847
848 More generally, you can use the variable @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
849 to control which values of the @code{invisible} property make text
850 invisible. This permits you to classify the text into different subsets
851 in advance, by giving them different @code{invisible} values, and
852 subsequently make various subsets visible or invisible by changing the
853 value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
854
855 Controlling visibility with @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is
856 especially useful in a program to display the list of entries in a
857 database. It permits the implementation of convenient filtering
858 commands to view just a part of the entries in the database. Setting
859 this variable is very fast, much faster than scanning all the text in
860 the buffer looking for properties to change.
861
862 @defvar buffer-invisibility-spec
863 This variable specifies which kinds of @code{invisible} properties
864 actually make a character invisible. Setting this variable makes it
865 buffer-local.
866
867 @table @asis
868 @item @code{t}
869 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property is
870 non-@code{nil}. This is the default.
871
872 @item a list
873 Each element of the list specifies a criterion for invisibility; if a
874 character's @code{invisible} property fits any one of these criteria,
875 the character is invisible. The list can have two kinds of elements:
876
877 @table @code
878 @item @var{atom}
879 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
880 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
881 is done with @code{eq}.
882
883 @item (@var{atom} . t)
884 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
885 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
886 is done with @code{eq}. Moreover, a sequence of such characters
887 displays as an ellipsis.
888 @end table
889 @end table
890 @end defvar
891
892 Two functions are specifically provided for adding elements to
893 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and removing elements from it.
894
895 @defun add-to-invisibility-spec element
896 This function adds the element @var{element} to
897 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. If @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
898 was @code{t}, it changes to a list, @code{(t)}, so that text whose
899 @code{invisible} property is @code{t} remains invisible.
900 @end defun
901
902 @defun remove-from-invisibility-spec element
903 This removes the element @var{element} from
904 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. This does nothing if @var{element}
905 is not in the list.
906 @end defun
907
908 A convention for use of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is that a
909 major mode should use the mode's own name as an element of
910 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and as the value of the
911 @code{invisible} property:
912
913 @example
914 ;; @r{If you want to display an ellipsis:}
915 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
916 ;; @r{If you don't want ellipsis:}
917 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
918
919 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end)
920 'invisible 'my-symbol)
921
922 ;; @r{When done with the invisibility:}
923 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
924 ;; @r{Or respectively:}
925 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
926 @end example
927
928 You can check for invisibility using the following function:
929
930 @defun invisible-p pos-or-prop
931 If @var{pos-or-prop} is a marker or number, this function returns a
932 non-@code{nil} value if the text at that position is invisible.
933
934 If @var{pos-or-prop} is any other kind of Lisp object, that is taken
935 to mean a possible value of the @code{invisible} text or overlay
936 property. In that case, this function returns a non-@code{nil} value
937 if that value would cause text to become invisible, based on the
938 current value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
939 @end defun
940
941 @vindex line-move-ignore-invisible
942 Ordinarily, functions that operate on text or move point do not care
943 whether the text is invisible, they process invisible characters and
944 visible characters alike. The user-level line motion commands,
945 such as @code{next-line}, @code{previous-line}, ignore invisible
946 newlines if @code{line-move-ignore-invisible} is non-@code{nil} (the
947 default), i.e., behave like these invisible newlines didn't exist in
948 the buffer, but only because they are explicitly programmed to do so.
949
950 If a command ends with point inside or at the boundary of
951 invisible text, the main editing loop relocates point to one of the
952 two ends of the invisible text. Emacs chooses the direction of
953 relocation so that it is the same as the overall movement direction of
954 the command; if in doubt, it prefers a position where an inserted char
955 would not inherit the @code{invisible} property. Additionally, if the
956 text is not replaced by an ellipsis and the command only moved within
957 the invisible text, then point is moved one extra character so as to
958 try and reflect the command's movement by a visible movement of the
959 cursor.
960
961 Thus, if the command moved point back to an invisible range (with the usual
962 stickiness), Emacs moves point back to the beginning of that range. If the
963 command moved point forward into an invisible range, Emacs moves point forward
964 to the first visible character that follows the invisible text and then forward
965 one more character.
966
967 These @dfn{adjustments} of point that ended up in the middle of
968 invisible text can be disabled by setting @code{disable-point-adjustment}
969 to a non-@code{nil} value. @xref{Adjusting Point}.
970
971 Incremental search can make invisible overlays visible temporarily
972 and/or permanently when a match includes invisible text. To enable
973 this, the overlay should have a non-@code{nil}
974 @code{isearch-open-invisible} property. The property value should be a
975 function to be called with the overlay as an argument. This function
976 should make the overlay visible permanently; it is used when the match
977 overlaps the overlay on exit from the search.
978
979 During the search, such overlays are made temporarily visible by
980 temporarily modifying their invisible and intangible properties. If you
981 want this to be done differently for a certain overlay, give it an
982 @code{isearch-open-invisible-temporary} property which is a function.
983 The function is called with two arguments: the first is the overlay, and
984 the second is @code{nil} to make the overlay visible, or @code{t} to
985 make it invisible again.
986
987 @node Selective Display
988 @section Selective Display
989 @c @cindex selective display Duplicates selective-display
990
991 @dfn{Selective display} refers to a pair of related features for
992 hiding certain lines on the screen.
993
994 @cindex explicit selective display
995 The first variant, explicit selective display, was designed for use in a Lisp
996 program: it controls which lines are hidden by altering the text. This kind of
997 hiding is now obsolete; instead you can get the same effect with the
998 @code{invisible} property (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
999
1000 In the second variant, the choice of lines to hide is made
1001 automatically based on indentation. This variant is designed to be a
1002 user-level feature.
1003
1004 The way you control explicit selective display is by replacing a
1005 newline (control-j) with a carriage return (control-m). The text that
1006 was formerly a line following that newline is now hidden. Strictly
1007 speaking, it is temporarily no longer a line at all, since only
1008 newlines can separate lines; it is now part of the previous line.
1009
1010 Selective display does not directly affect editing commands. For
1011 example, @kbd{C-f} (@code{forward-char}) moves point unhesitatingly
1012 into hidden text. However, the replacement of newline characters with
1013 carriage return characters affects some editing commands. For
1014 example, @code{next-line} skips hidden lines, since it searches only
1015 for newlines. Modes that use selective display can also define
1016 commands that take account of the newlines, or that control which
1017 parts of the text are hidden.
1018
1019 When you write a selectively displayed buffer into a file, all the
1020 control-m's are output as newlines. This means that when you next read
1021 in the file, it looks OK, with nothing hidden. The selective display
1022 effect is seen only within Emacs.
1023
1024 @defvar selective-display
1025 This buffer-local variable enables selective display. This means that
1026 lines, or portions of lines, may be made hidden.
1027
1028 @itemize @bullet
1029 @item
1030 If the value of @code{selective-display} is @code{t}, then the character
1031 control-m marks the start of hidden text; the control-m, and the rest
1032 of the line following it, are not displayed. This is explicit selective
1033 display.
1034
1035 @item
1036 If the value of @code{selective-display} is a positive integer, then
1037 lines that start with more than that many columns of indentation are not
1038 displayed.
1039 @end itemize
1040
1041 When some portion of a buffer is hidden, the vertical movement
1042 commands operate as if that portion did not exist, allowing a single
1043 @code{next-line} command to skip any number of hidden lines.
1044 However, character movement commands (such as @code{forward-char}) do
1045 not skip the hidden portion, and it is possible (if tricky) to insert
1046 or delete text in an hidden portion.
1047
1048 In the examples below, we show the @emph{display appearance} of the
1049 buffer @code{foo}, which changes with the value of
1050 @code{selective-display}. The @emph{contents} of the buffer do not
1051 change.
1052
1053 @example
1054 @group
1055 (setq selective-display nil)
1056 @result{} nil
1057
1058 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1059 1 on this column
1060 2on this column
1061 3n this column
1062 3n this column
1063 2on this column
1064 1 on this column
1065 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1066 @end group
1067
1068 @group
1069 (setq selective-display 2)
1070 @result{} 2
1071
1072 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1073 1 on this column
1074 2on this column
1075 2on this column
1076 1 on this column
1077 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1078 @end group
1079 @end example
1080 @end defvar
1081
1082 @defopt selective-display-ellipses
1083 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, then Emacs displays
1084 @samp{@dots{}} at the end of a line that is followed by hidden text.
1085 This example is a continuation of the previous one.
1086
1087 @example
1088 @group
1089 (setq selective-display-ellipses t)
1090 @result{} t
1091
1092 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1093 1 on this column
1094 2on this column ...
1095 2on this column
1096 1 on this column
1097 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1098 @end group
1099 @end example
1100
1101 You can use a display table to substitute other text for the ellipsis
1102 (@samp{@dots{}}). @xref{Display Tables}.
1103 @end defopt
1104
1105 @node Temporary Displays
1106 @section Temporary Displays
1107 @cindex temporary display
1108 @cindex temporary buffer display
1109
1110 Temporary displays are used by Lisp programs to put output into a
1111 buffer and then present it to the user for perusal rather than for
1112 editing. Many help commands use this feature.
1113
1114 @defmac with-output-to-temp-buffer buffer-name body@dots{}
1115 This function executes the forms in @var{body} while arranging to insert
1116 any output they print into the buffer named @var{buffer-name}, which is
1117 first created if necessary, and put into Help mode. (See the similar
1118 form @code{with-temp-buffer-window} below.) Finally, the buffer is
1119 displayed in some window, but that window is not selected.
1120
1121 If the forms in @var{body} do not change the major mode in the output
1122 buffer, so that it is still Help mode at the end of their execution,
1123 then @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} makes this buffer read-only at
1124 the end, and also scans it for function and variable names to make them
1125 into clickable cross-references. @xref{Docstring hyperlinks, , Tips for
1126 Documentation Strings}, in particular the item on hyperlinks in
1127 documentation strings, for more details.
1128
1129 The string @var{buffer-name} specifies the temporary buffer, which need
1130 not already exist. The argument must be a string, not a buffer. The
1131 buffer is erased initially (with no questions asked), and it is marked
1132 as unmodified after @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} exits.
1133
1134 @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} binds @code{standard-output} to the
1135 temporary buffer, then it evaluates the forms in @var{body}. Output
1136 using the Lisp output functions within @var{body} goes by default to
1137 that buffer (but screen display and messages in the echo area, although
1138 they are ``output'' in the general sense of the word, are not affected).
1139 @xref{Output Functions}.
1140
1141 Several hooks are available for customizing the behavior
1142 of this construct; they are listed below.
1143
1144 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned.
1145
1146 @example
1147 @group
1148 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1149 This is the contents of foo.
1150 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1151 @end group
1152
1153 @group
1154 (with-output-to-temp-buffer "foo"
1155 (print 20)
1156 (print standard-output))
1157 @result{} #<buffer foo>
1158
1159 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1160
1161 20
1162
1163 #<buffer foo>
1164
1165 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1166 @end group
1167 @end example
1168 @end defmac
1169
1170 @defopt temp-buffer-show-function
1171 If this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}
1172 calls it as a function to do the job of displaying a help buffer. The
1173 function gets one argument, which is the buffer it should display.
1174
1175 It is a good idea for this function to run @code{temp-buffer-show-hook}
1176 just as @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} normally would, inside of
1177 @code{save-selected-window} and with the chosen window and buffer
1178 selected.
1179 @end defopt
1180
1181 @defvar temp-buffer-setup-hook
1182 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} before
1183 evaluating @var{body}. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer is
1184 current. This hook is normally set up with a function to put the
1185 buffer in Help mode.
1186 @end defvar
1187
1188 @defvar temp-buffer-show-hook
1189 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} after
1190 displaying the temporary buffer. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer
1191 is current, and the window it was displayed in is selected.
1192 @end defvar
1193
1194 @defmac with-temp-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function body@dots{}
1195 This macro is similar to @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}. Like that
1196 construct, it executes @var{body} while arranging to insert any output
1197 it prints into the buffer named @var{buffer-or-name} and displays that
1198 buffer in some window. Unlike @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer},
1199 however, it does not automatically switch that buffer to Help mode.
1200
1201 The argument @var{buffer-or-name} specifies the temporary buffer. It
1202 can be either a buffer, which must already exist, or a string, in which
1203 case a buffer of that name is created, if necessary. The buffer is
1204 marked as unmodified and read-only when @code{with-temp-buffer-window}
1205 exits.
1206
1207 This macro does not call @code{temp-buffer-show-function}. Rather, it
1208 passes the @var{action} argument to @code{display-buffer}
1209 (@pxref{Choosing Window}) in order to display the buffer.
1210
1211 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned, unless the
1212 argument @var{quit-function} is specified. In that case, it is called
1213 with two arguments: the window showing the buffer and the result of
1214 @var{body}. The final return value is then whatever @var{quit-function}
1215 returns.
1216
1217 @vindex temp-buffer-window-setup-hook
1218 @vindex temp-buffer-window-show-hook
1219 This macro uses the normal hooks @code{temp-buffer-window-setup-hook}
1220 and @code{temp-buffer-window-show-hook} in place of the analogous hooks
1221 run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}.
1222 @end defmac
1223
1224 The two constructs described next are mostly identical to
1225 @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but differ from it as specified:
1226
1227 @defmac with-current-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1228 This macro is like @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but unlike that makes
1229 the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} current for running
1230 @var{body}.
1231 @end defmac
1232
1233 @defmac with-displayed-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1234 This macro is like @code{with-current-buffer-window} but unlike that
1235 displays the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} @emph{before}
1236 running @var{body}.
1237 @end defmac
1238
1239 A window showing a temporary buffer can be fit to the size of that
1240 buffer using the following mode:
1241
1242 @defopt temp-buffer-resize-mode
1243 When this minor mode is enabled, windows showing a temporary buffer are
1244 automatically resized to fit their buffer's contents.
1245
1246 A window is resized if and only if it has been specially created for the
1247 buffer. In particular, windows that have shown another buffer before
1248 are not resized. By default, this mode uses @code{fit-window-to-buffer}
1249 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) for resizing. You can specify a different
1250 function by customizing the options @code{temp-buffer-max-height} and
1251 @code{temp-buffer-max-width} below.
1252 @end defopt
1253
1254 @defopt temp-buffer-max-height
1255 This option specifies the maximum height (in lines) of a window
1256 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1257 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the height
1258 for such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return
1259 a positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to
1260 be resized is selected.
1261 @end defopt
1262
1263 @defopt temp-buffer-max-width
1264 This option specifies the maximum width of a window (in columns)
1265 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1266 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the width for
1267 such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return a
1268 positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to be
1269 resized is selected.
1270 @end defopt
1271
1272 The following function uses the current buffer for temporal display:
1273
1274 @defun momentary-string-display string position &optional char message
1275 This function momentarily displays @var{string} in the current buffer at
1276 @var{position}. It has no effect on the undo list or on the buffer's
1277 modification status.
1278
1279 The momentary display remains until the next input event. If the next
1280 input event is @var{char}, @code{momentary-string-display} ignores it
1281 and returns. Otherwise, that event remains buffered for subsequent use
1282 as input. Thus, typing @var{char} will simply remove the string from
1283 the display, while typing (say) @kbd{C-f} will remove the string from
1284 the display and later (presumably) move point forward. The argument
1285 @var{char} is a space by default.
1286
1287 The return value of @code{momentary-string-display} is not meaningful.
1288
1289 If the string @var{string} does not contain control characters, you can
1290 do the same job in a more general way by creating (and then subsequently
1291 deleting) an overlay with a @code{before-string} property.
1292 @xref{Overlay Properties}.
1293
1294 If @var{message} is non-@code{nil}, it is displayed in the echo area
1295 while @var{string} is displayed in the buffer. If it is @code{nil}, a
1296 default message says to type @var{char} to continue.
1297
1298 In this example, point is initially located at the beginning of the
1299 second line:
1300
1301 @example
1302 @group
1303 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1304 This is the contents of foo.
1305 @point{}Second line.
1306 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1307 @end group
1308
1309 @group
1310 (momentary-string-display
1311 "**** Important Message! ****"
1312 (point) ?\r
1313 "Type RET when done reading")
1314 @result{} t
1315 @end group
1316
1317 @group
1318 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1319 This is the contents of foo.
1320 **** Important Message! ****Second line.
1321 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1322
1323 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1324 Type RET when done reading
1325 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1326 @end group
1327 @end example
1328 @end defun
1329
1330 @node Overlays
1331 @section Overlays
1332 @cindex overlays
1333 @c FIXME: mention intervals in this section?
1334
1335 You can use @dfn{overlays} to alter the appearance of a buffer's text on
1336 the screen, for the sake of presentation features. An overlay is an
1337 object that belongs to a particular buffer, and has a specified
1338 beginning and end. It also has properties that you can examine and set;
1339 these affect the display of the text within the overlay.
1340
1341 @cindex scalability of overlays
1342 @cindex overlays, scalability
1343 The visual effect of an overlay is the same as of the corresponding
1344 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}). However, due to a different
1345 implementation, overlays generally don't scale well (many operations
1346 take a time that is proportional to the number of overlays in the
1347 buffer). If you need to affect the visual appearance of many portions
1348 in the buffer, we recommend using text properties.
1349
1350 An overlay uses markers to record its beginning and end; thus,
1351 editing the text of the buffer adjusts the beginning and end of each
1352 overlay so that it stays with the text. When you create the overlay,
1353 you can specify whether text inserted at the beginning should be
1354 inside the overlay or outside, and likewise for the end of the overlay.
1355
1356 @menu
1357 * Managing Overlays:: Creating and moving overlays.
1358 * Overlay Properties:: How to read and set properties.
1359 What properties do to the screen display.
1360 * Finding Overlays:: Searching for overlays.
1361 @end menu
1362
1363 @node Managing Overlays
1364 @subsection Managing Overlays
1365 @cindex managing overlays
1366 @cindex overlays, managing
1367
1368 This section describes the functions to create, delete and move
1369 overlays, and to examine their contents. Overlay changes are not
1370 recorded in the buffer's undo list, since the overlays are not
1371 part of the buffer's contents.
1372
1373 @defun overlayp object
1374 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an overlay.
1375 @end defun
1376
1377 @defun make-overlay start end &optional buffer front-advance rear-advance
1378 This function creates and returns an overlay that belongs to
1379 @var{buffer} and ranges from @var{start} to @var{end}. Both @var{start}
1380 and @var{end} must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or
1381 markers. If @var{buffer} is omitted, the overlay is created in the
1382 current buffer.
1383
1384 @cindex empty overlay
1385 @cindex overlay, empty
1386 An overlay whose @var{start} and @var{end} specify the same buffer
1387 position is known as @dfn{empty}. A non-empty overlay can become
1388 empty if the text between its @var{start} and @var{end} is deleted.
1389 When that happens, the overlay is by default not deleted, but you can
1390 cause it to be deleted by giving it the @samp{evaporate} property
1391 (@pxref{Overlay Properties, evaporate property}).
1392
1393 The arguments @var{front-advance} and @var{rear-advance} specify the
1394 marker insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of
1395 the overlay, respectively. @xref{Marker Insertion Types}. If they
1396 are both @code{nil}, the default, then the overlay extends to include
1397 any text inserted at the beginning, but not text inserted at the end.
1398 If @var{front-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the
1399 beginning of the overlay is excluded from the overlay. If
1400 @var{rear-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the end of the
1401 overlay is included in the overlay.
1402 @end defun
1403
1404 @defun overlay-start overlay
1405 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} starts,
1406 as an integer.
1407 @end defun
1408
1409 @defun overlay-end overlay
1410 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} ends,
1411 as an integer.
1412 @end defun
1413
1414 @defun overlay-buffer overlay
1415 This function returns the buffer that @var{overlay} belongs to. It
1416 returns @code{nil} if @var{overlay} has been deleted.
1417 @end defun
1418
1419 @defun delete-overlay overlay
1420 This function deletes @var{overlay}. The overlay continues to exist as
1421 a Lisp object, and its property list is unchanged, but it ceases to be
1422 attached to the buffer it belonged to, and ceases to have any effect on
1423 display.
1424
1425 A deleted overlay is not permanently disconnected. You can give it a
1426 position in a buffer again by calling @code{move-overlay}.
1427 @end defun
1428
1429 @defun move-overlay overlay start end &optional buffer
1430 This function moves @var{overlay} to @var{buffer}, and places its bounds
1431 at @var{start} and @var{end}. Both arguments @var{start} and @var{end}
1432 must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers.
1433
1434 If @var{buffer} is omitted, @var{overlay} stays in the same buffer it
1435 was already associated with; if @var{overlay} was deleted, it goes into
1436 the current buffer.
1437
1438 The return value is @var{overlay}.
1439
1440 This is the only valid way to change the endpoints of an overlay. Do
1441 not try modifying the markers in the overlay by hand, as that fails to
1442 update other vital data structures and can cause some overlays to be
1443 lost.
1444 @end defun
1445
1446 @defun remove-overlays &optional start end name value
1447 This function removes all the overlays between @var{start} and
1448 @var{end} whose property @var{name} has the value @var{value}. It can
1449 move the endpoints of the overlays in the region, or split them.
1450
1451 If @var{name} is omitted or @code{nil}, it means to delete all overlays in
1452 the specified region. If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are omitted or
1453 @code{nil}, that means the beginning and end of the buffer respectively.
1454 Therefore, @code{(remove-overlays)} removes all the overlays in the
1455 current buffer.
1456 @end defun
1457
1458 @defun copy-overlay overlay
1459 This function returns a copy of @var{overlay}. The copy has the same
1460 endpoints and properties as @var{overlay}. However, the marker
1461 insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of the
1462 overlay are set to their default values (@pxref{Marker Insertion
1463 Types}).
1464 @end defun
1465
1466 Here are some examples:
1467
1468 @example
1469 ;; @r{Create an overlay.}
1470 (setq foo (make-overlay 1 10))
1471 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 10 in display.texi>
1472 (overlay-start foo)
1473 @result{} 1
1474 (overlay-end foo)
1475 @result{} 10
1476 (overlay-buffer foo)
1477 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1478 ;; @r{Give it a property we can check later.}
1479 (overlay-put foo 'happy t)
1480 @result{} t
1481 ;; @r{Verify the property is present.}
1482 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1483 @result{} t
1484 ;; @r{Move the overlay.}
1485 (move-overlay foo 5 20)
1486 @result{} #<overlay from 5 to 20 in display.texi>
1487 (overlay-start foo)
1488 @result{} 5
1489 (overlay-end foo)
1490 @result{} 20
1491 ;; @r{Delete the overlay.}
1492 (delete-overlay foo)
1493 @result{} nil
1494 ;; @r{Verify it is deleted.}
1495 foo
1496 @result{} #<overlay in no buffer>
1497 ;; @r{A deleted overlay has no position.}
1498 (overlay-start foo)
1499 @result{} nil
1500 (overlay-end foo)
1501 @result{} nil
1502 (overlay-buffer foo)
1503 @result{} nil
1504 ;; @r{Undelete the overlay.}
1505 (move-overlay foo 1 20)
1506 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 20 in display.texi>
1507 ;; @r{Verify the results.}
1508 (overlay-start foo)
1509 @result{} 1
1510 (overlay-end foo)
1511 @result{} 20
1512 (overlay-buffer foo)
1513 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1514 ;; @r{Moving and deleting the overlay does not change its properties.}
1515 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1516 @result{} t
1517 @end example
1518
1519 Emacs stores the overlays of each buffer in two lists, divided
1520 around an arbitrary center position. One list extends backwards
1521 through the buffer from that center position, and the other extends
1522 forwards from that center position. The center position can be anywhere
1523 in the buffer.
1524
1525 @defun overlay-recenter pos
1526 This function recenters the overlays of the current buffer around
1527 position @var{pos}. That makes overlay lookup faster for positions
1528 near @var{pos}, but slower for positions far away from @var{pos}.
1529 @end defun
1530
1531 A loop that scans the buffer forwards, creating overlays, can run
1532 faster if you do @code{(overlay-recenter (point-max))} first.
1533
1534 @node Overlay Properties
1535 @subsection Overlay Properties
1536 @cindex overlay properties
1537
1538 Overlay properties are like text properties in that the properties that
1539 alter how a character is displayed can come from either source. But in
1540 most respects they are different. @xref{Text Properties}, for comparison.
1541
1542 Text properties are considered a part of the text; overlays and
1543 their properties are specifically considered not to be part of the
1544 text. Thus, copying text between various buffers and strings
1545 preserves text properties, but does not try to preserve overlays.
1546 Changing a buffer's text properties marks the buffer as modified,
1547 while moving an overlay or changing its properties does not. Unlike
1548 text property changes, overlay property changes are not recorded in
1549 the buffer's undo list.
1550
1551 Since more than one overlay can specify a property value for the
1552 same character, Emacs lets you specify a priority value of each
1553 overlay. In case two overlays have the same priority value, and one
1554 is nested in the other, then the inner one will have priority over the
1555 outer one. If neither is nested in the other then you should not make
1556 assumptions about which overlay will prevail.
1557
1558 These functions read and set the properties of an overlay:
1559
1560 @defun overlay-get overlay prop
1561 This function returns the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1562 @var{overlay}, if any. If @var{overlay} does not record any value for
1563 that property, but it does have a @code{category} property which is a
1564 symbol, that symbol's @var{prop} property is used. Otherwise, the value
1565 is @code{nil}.
1566 @end defun
1567
1568 @defun overlay-put overlay prop value
1569 This function sets the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1570 @var{overlay} to @var{value}. It returns @var{value}.
1571 @end defun
1572
1573 @defun overlay-properties overlay
1574 This returns a copy of the property list of @var{overlay}.
1575 @end defun
1576
1577 See also the function @code{get-char-property} which checks both
1578 overlay properties and text properties for a given character.
1579 @xref{Examining Properties}.
1580
1581 Many overlay properties have special meanings; here is a table
1582 of them:
1583
1584 @table @code
1585 @item priority
1586 @kindex priority @r{(overlay property)}
1587 This property's value determines the priority of the overlay.
1588 If you want to specify a priority value, use either @code{nil}
1589 (or zero), or a positive integer. Any other value has undefined behavior.
1590
1591 The priority matters when two or more overlays cover the same
1592 character and both specify the same property; the one whose
1593 @code{priority} value is larger overrides the other. For the
1594 @code{face} property, the higher priority overlay's value does not
1595 completely override the other value; instead, its face attributes
1596 override the face attributes of the lower priority @code{face}
1597 property.
1598
1599 Currently, all overlays take priority over text properties.
1600
1601 Note that Emacs sometimes uses non-numeric priority values for some of
1602 its internal overlays, so do not try to do arithmetic on the
1603 priority of an overlay (unless it is one that you created). If you
1604 need to put overlays in priority order, use the @var{sorted} argument
1605 of @code{overlays-at}. @xref{Finding Overlays}.
1606
1607 @item window
1608 @kindex window @r{(overlay property)}
1609 If the @code{window} property is non-@code{nil}, then the overlay
1610 applies only on that window.
1611
1612 @item category
1613 @kindex category @r{(overlay property)}
1614 If an overlay has a @code{category} property, we call it the
1615 @dfn{category} of the overlay. It should be a symbol. The properties
1616 of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the overlay.
1617
1618 @item face
1619 @kindex face @r{(overlay property)}
1620 This property controls the appearance of the text (@pxref{Faces}).
1621 The value of the property can be the following:
1622
1623 @itemize @bullet
1624 @item
1625 A face name (a symbol or string).
1626
1627 @item
1628 An anonymous face: a property list of the form @code{(@var{keyword}
1629 @var{value} @dots{})}, where each @var{keyword} is a face attribute
1630 name and @var{value} is a value for that attribute.
1631
1632 @item
1633 A list of faces. Each list element should be either a face name or an
1634 anonymous face. This specifies a face which is an aggregate of the
1635 attributes of each of the listed faces. Faces occurring earlier in
1636 the list have higher priority.
1637
1638 @item
1639 A cons cell of the form @code{(foreground-color . @var{color-name})}
1640 or @code{(background-color . @var{color-name})}. This specifies the
1641 foreground or background color, similar to @code{(:foreground
1642 @var{color-name})} or @code{(:background @var{color-name})}. This
1643 form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
1644 avoided.
1645 @end itemize
1646
1647 @item mouse-face
1648 @kindex mouse-face @r{(overlay property)}
1649 This property is used instead of @code{face} when the mouse is within
1650 the range of the overlay. However, Emacs ignores all face attributes
1651 from this property that alter the text size (e.g., @code{:height},
1652 @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}). Those attributes are always the
1653 same as in the unhighlighted text.
1654
1655 @item display
1656 @kindex display @r{(overlay property)}
1657 This property activates various features that change the
1658 way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
1659 or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrower, or replaced with an image.
1660 @xref{Display Property}.
1661
1662 @item help-echo
1663 @kindex help-echo @r{(overlay property)}
1664 If an overlay has a @code{help-echo} property, then when you move the
1665 mouse onto the text in the overlay, Emacs displays a help string in the
1666 echo area, or in the tooltip window. For details see @ref{Text
1667 help-echo}.
1668
1669 @item field
1670 @kindex field @r{(overlay property)}
1671 @c Copied from Special Properties.
1672 Consecutive characters with the same @code{field} property constitute a
1673 @emph{field}. Some motion functions including @code{forward-word} and
1674 @code{beginning-of-line} stop moving at a field boundary.
1675 @xref{Fields}.
1676
1677 @item modification-hooks
1678 @kindex modification-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1679 This property's value is a list of functions to be called if any
1680 character within the overlay is changed or if text is inserted strictly
1681 within the overlay.
1682
1683 The hook functions are called both before and after each change.
1684 If the functions save the information they receive, and compare notes
1685 between calls, they can determine exactly what change has been made
1686 in the buffer text.
1687
1688 When called before a change, each function receives four arguments: the
1689 overlay, @code{nil}, and the beginning and end of the text range to be
1690 modified.
1691
1692 When called after a change, each function receives five arguments: the
1693 overlay, @code{t}, the beginning and end of the text range just
1694 modified, and the length of the pre-change text replaced by that range.
1695 (For an insertion, the pre-change length is zero; for a deletion, that
1696 length is the number of characters deleted, and the post-change
1697 beginning and end are equal.)
1698
1699 If these functions modify the buffer, they should bind
1700 @code{inhibit-modification-hooks} to @code{t} around doing so, to
1701 avoid confusing the internal mechanism that calls these hooks.
1702
1703 Text properties also support the @code{modification-hooks} property,
1704 but the details are somewhat different (@pxref{Special Properties}).
1705
1706 @item insert-in-front-hooks
1707 @kindex insert-in-front-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1708 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1709 after inserting text right at the beginning of the overlay. The calling
1710 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1711
1712 @item insert-behind-hooks
1713 @kindex insert-behind-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1714 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1715 after inserting text right at the end of the overlay. The calling
1716 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1717
1718 @item invisible
1719 @kindex invisible @r{(overlay property)}
1720 The @code{invisible} property can make the text in the overlay
1721 invisible, which means that it does not appear on the screen.
1722 @xref{Invisible Text}, for details.
1723
1724 @item intangible
1725 @kindex intangible @r{(overlay property)}
1726 The @code{intangible} property on an overlay works just like the
1727 @code{intangible} text property. It is obsolete. @xref{Special
1728 Properties}, for details.
1729
1730 @item isearch-open-invisible
1731 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1732 visible, permanently, if the final match overlaps it. @xref{Invisible
1733 Text}.
1734
1735 @item isearch-open-invisible-temporary
1736 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1737 visible, temporarily, during the search. @xref{Invisible Text}.
1738
1739 @item before-string
1740 @kindex before-string @r{(overlay property)}
1741 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the beginning
1742 of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1743 sense---only on the screen.
1744
1745 @item after-string
1746 @kindex after-string @r{(overlay property)}
1747 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the end of
1748 the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1749 sense---only on the screen.
1750
1751 @item line-prefix
1752 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each
1753 non-continuation line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1754
1755 @item wrap-prefix
1756 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each continuation
1757 line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1758
1759 @item evaporate
1760 @kindex evaporate @r{(overlay property)}
1761 If this property is non-@code{nil}, the overlay is deleted automatically
1762 if it becomes empty (i.e., if its length becomes zero). If you give
1763 an empty overlay (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) a
1764 non-@code{nil} @code{evaporate} property, that deletes it immediately.
1765 Note that, unless an overlay has this property, it will not be deleted
1766 when the text between its starting and ending positions is deleted
1767 from the buffer.
1768
1769 @item keymap
1770 @cindex keymap of character (and overlays)
1771 @kindex keymap @r{(overlay property)}
1772 If this property is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a keymap for a portion of the
1773 text. This keymap is used when the character after point is within the
1774 overlay, and takes precedence over most other keymaps. @xref{Active Keymaps}.
1775
1776 @item local-map
1777 @kindex local-map @r{(overlay property)}
1778 The @code{local-map} property is similar to @code{keymap} but replaces the
1779 buffer's local map rather than augmenting existing keymaps. This also means it
1780 has lower precedence than minor mode keymaps.
1781 @end table
1782
1783 The @code{keymap} and @code{local-map} properties do not affect a
1784 string displayed by the @code{before-string}, @code{after-string}, or
1785 @code{display} properties. This is only relevant for mouse clicks and
1786 other mouse events that fall on the string, since point is never on
1787 the string. To bind special mouse events for the string, assign it a
1788 @code{keymap} or @code{local-map} text property. @xref{Special
1789 Properties}.
1790
1791 @node Finding Overlays
1792 @subsection Searching for Overlays
1793 @cindex searching for overlays
1794 @cindex overlays, searching for
1795
1796 @defun overlays-at pos &optional sorted
1797 This function returns a list of all the overlays that cover the character at
1798 position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If @var{sorted} is non-@code{nil},
1799 the list is in decreasing order of priority, otherwise it is in no particular
1800 order. An overlay contains position @var{pos} if it begins at or before
1801 @var{pos}, and ends after @var{pos}.
1802
1803 To illustrate usage, here is a Lisp function that returns a list of the
1804 overlays that specify property @var{prop} for the character at point:
1805
1806 @smallexample
1807 (defun find-overlays-specifying (prop)
1808 (let ((overlays (overlays-at (point)))
1809 found)
1810 (while overlays
1811 (let ((overlay (car overlays)))
1812 (if (overlay-get overlay prop)
1813 (setq found (cons overlay found))))
1814 (setq overlays (cdr overlays)))
1815 found))
1816 @end smallexample
1817 @end defun
1818
1819 @defun overlays-in beg end
1820 This function returns a list of the overlays that overlap the region
1821 @var{beg} through @var{end}. An overlay overlaps with a region if it
1822 contains one or more characters in the region; empty overlays
1823 (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) overlap if they are at
1824 @var{beg}, strictly between @var{beg} and @var{end}, or at @var{end}
1825 when @var{end} denotes the position at the end of the buffer.
1826 @end defun
1827
1828 @defun next-overlay-change pos
1829 This function returns the buffer position of the next beginning or end
1830 of an overlay, after @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1831 @code{(point-max)}.
1832 @end defun
1833
1834 @defun previous-overlay-change pos
1835 This function returns the buffer position of the previous beginning or
1836 end of an overlay, before @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1837 @code{(point-min)}.
1838 @end defun
1839
1840 As an example, here's a simplified (and inefficient) version of the
1841 primitive function @code{next-single-char-property-change}
1842 (@pxref{Property Search}). It searches forward from position
1843 @var{pos} for the next position where the value of a given property
1844 @code{prop}, as obtained from either overlays or text properties,
1845 changes.
1846
1847 @smallexample
1848 (defun next-single-char-property-change (position prop)
1849 (save-excursion
1850 (goto-char position)
1851 (let ((propval (get-char-property (point) prop)))
1852 (while (and (not (eobp))
1853 (eq (get-char-property (point) prop) propval))
1854 (goto-char (min (next-overlay-change (point))
1855 (next-single-property-change (point) prop)))))
1856 (point)))
1857 @end smallexample
1858
1859 @node Size of Displayed Text
1860 @section Size of Displayed Text
1861 @cindex size of text on display
1862 @cindex character width on display
1863
1864 Since not all characters have the same width, these functions let you
1865 check the width of a character. @xref{Primitive Indent}, and
1866 @ref{Screen Lines}, for related functions.
1867
1868 @defun char-width char
1869 This function returns the width in columns of the character
1870 @var{char}, if it were displayed in the current buffer (i.e., taking
1871 into account the buffer's display table, if any; @pxref{Display
1872 Tables}). The width of a tab character is usually @code{tab-width}
1873 (@pxref{Usual Display}).
1874 @end defun
1875
1876 @defun string-width string
1877 This function returns the width in columns of the string @var{string},
1878 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
1879 @end defun
1880
1881 @defun truncate-string-to-width string width &optional start-column padding ellipsis
1882 This function returns the part of @var{string} that fits within
1883 @var{width} columns, as a new string.
1884
1885 If @var{string} does not reach @var{width}, then the result ends where
1886 @var{string} ends. If one multi-column character in @var{string}
1887 extends across the column @var{width}, that character is not included in
1888 the result. Thus, the result can fall short of @var{width} but cannot
1889 go beyond it.
1890
1891 The optional argument @var{start-column} specifies the starting column.
1892 If this is non-@code{nil}, then the first @var{start-column} columns of
1893 the string are omitted from the value. If one multi-column character in
1894 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}, that
1895 character is not included.
1896
1897 The optional argument @var{padding}, if non-@code{nil}, is a padding
1898 character added at the beginning and end of the result string, to extend
1899 it to exactly @var{width} columns. The padding character is used at the
1900 end of the result if it falls short of @var{width}. It is also used at
1901 the beginning of the result if one multi-column character in
1902 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}.
1903
1904 @vindex truncate-string-ellipsis
1905 If @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil}, it should be a string which will
1906 replace the end of @var{string} (including any padding) if it extends
1907 beyond @var{width}, unless the display width of @var{string} is equal
1908 to or less than the display width of @var{ellipsis}. If
1909 @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil} and not a string, it stands for
1910 the value of the variable @code{truncate-string-ellipsis}.
1911
1912 @example
1913 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4)
1914 @result{} "ab"
1915 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4 ?\s)
1916 @result{} " ab "
1917 @end example
1918 @end defun
1919
1920 The following function returns the size in pixels of text as if it were
1921 displayed in a given window. This function is used by
1922 @code{fit-window-to-buffer} and @code{fit-frame-to-buffer}
1923 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) to make a window exactly as large as the text
1924 it contains.
1925
1926 @defun window-text-pixel-size &optional window from to x-limit y-limit mode-and-header-line
1927 This function returns the size of the text of @var{window}'s buffer in
1928 pixels. @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected
1929 one. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text
1930 line and the maximum pixel-height of all text lines.
1931
1932 The optional argument @var{from}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the first
1933 text position to consider and defaults to the minimum accessible
1934 position of the buffer. If @var{from} is @code{t}, it uses the minimum
1935 accessible position that is not a newline character. The optional
1936 argument @var{to}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the last text position
1937 to consider and defaults to the maximum accessible position of the
1938 buffer. If @var{to} is @code{t}, it uses the maximum accessible
1939 position that is not a newline character.
1940
1941 The optional argument @var{x-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1942 maximum pixel-width that can be returned. @var{x-limit} @code{nil} or
1943 omitted, means to use the pixel-width of @var{window}'s body
1944 (@pxref{Window Sizes}); this is useful when the caller does not intend
1945 to change the width of @var{window}. Otherwise, the caller should
1946 specify here the maximum width @var{window}'s body may assume. Text
1947 whose x-coordinate is beyond @var{x-limit} is ignored. Since
1948 calculating the width of long lines can take some time, it's always a
1949 good idea to make this argument as small as needed; in particular, if
1950 the buffer might contain long lines that will be truncated anyway.
1951
1952 The optional argument @var{y-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1953 maximum pixel-height that can be returned. Text lines whose
1954 y-coordinate is beyond @var{y-limit} are ignored. Since calculating the
1955 pixel-height of a large buffer can take some time, it makes sense to
1956 specify this argument; in particular, if the caller does not know the
1957 size of the buffer.
1958
1959 The optional argument @var{mode-and-header-line} @code{nil} or omitted
1960 means to not include the height of the mode- or header-line of
1961 @var{window} in the return value. If it is either the symbol
1962 @code{mode-line} or @code{header-line}, include only the height of that
1963 line, if present, in the return value. If it is @code{t}, include the
1964 height of both, if present, in the return value.
1965 @end defun
1966
1967
1968 @node Line Height
1969 @section Line Height
1970 @cindex line height
1971 @cindex height of a line
1972
1973 The total height of each display line consists of the height of the
1974 contents of the line, plus optional additional vertical line spacing
1975 above or below the display line.
1976
1977 The height of the line contents is the maximum height of any character
1978 or image on that display line, including the final newline if there is
1979 one. (A display line that is continued doesn't include a final
1980 newline.) That is the default line height, if you do nothing to specify
1981 a greater height. (In the most common case, this equals the height of
1982 the corresponding frame's default font, see @ref{Frame Font}.)
1983
1984 There are several ways to explicitly specify a larger line height,
1985 either by specifying an absolute height for the display line, or by
1986 specifying vertical space. However, no matter what you specify, the
1987 actual line height can never be less than the default.
1988
1989 @kindex line-height @r{(text property)}
1990 A newline can have a @code{line-height} text or overlay property
1991 that controls the total height of the display line ending in that
1992 newline.
1993
1994 If the property value is @code{t}, the newline character has no
1995 effect on the displayed height of the line---the visible contents
1996 alone determine the height. This is useful for tiling small images
1997 (or image slices) without adding blank areas between the images.
1998
1999 If the property value is a list of the form @code{(@var{height}
2000 @var{total})}, that adds extra space @emph{below} the display line.
2001 First Emacs uses @var{height} as a height spec to control extra space
2002 @emph{above} the line; then it adds enough space @emph{below} the line
2003 to bring the total line height up to @var{total}. In this case, the
2004 other ways to specify the line spacing are ignored.
2005
2006 @cindex height spec
2007 Any other kind of property value is a height spec, which translates
2008 into a number---the specified line height. There are several ways to
2009 write a height spec; here's how each of them translates into a number:
2010
2011 @table @code
2012 @item @var{integer}
2013 If the height spec is a positive integer, the height value is that integer.
2014 @item @var{float}
2015 If the height spec is a float, @var{float}, the numeric height value
2016 is @var{float} times the frame's default line height.
2017 @item (@var{face} . @var{ratio})
2018 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2019 is @var{ratio} times the height of face @var{face}. @var{ratio} can
2020 be any type of number, or @code{nil} which means a ratio of 1.
2021 If @var{face} is @code{t}, it refers to the current face.
2022 @item (nil . @var{ratio})
2023 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2024 is @var{ratio} times the height of the contents of the line.
2025 @end table
2026
2027 Thus, any valid height spec determines the height in pixels, one way
2028 or another. If the line contents' height is less than that, Emacs
2029 adds extra vertical space above the line to achieve the specified
2030 total height.
2031
2032 If you don't specify the @code{line-height} property, the line's
2033 height consists of the contents' height plus the line spacing.
2034 There are several ways to specify the line spacing for different
2035 parts of Emacs text.
2036
2037 On graphical terminals, you can specify the line spacing for all
2038 lines in a frame, using the @code{line-spacing} frame parameter
2039 (@pxref{Layout Parameters}). However, if the default value of
2040 @code{line-spacing} is non-@code{nil}, it overrides the
2041 frame's @code{line-spacing} parameter. An integer specifies the
2042 number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number specifies
2043 the spacing relative to the frame's default line height.
2044
2045 @vindex line-spacing
2046 You can specify the line spacing for all lines in a buffer via the
2047 buffer-local @code{line-spacing} variable. An integer specifies
2048 the number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number
2049 specifies the spacing relative to the default frame line height. This
2050 overrides line spacings specified for the frame.
2051
2052 @kindex line-spacing @r{(text property)}
2053 Finally, a newline can have a @code{line-spacing} text or overlay
2054 property that overrides the default frame line spacing and the buffer
2055 local @code{line-spacing} variable, for the display line ending in
2056 that newline.
2057
2058 One way or another, these mechanisms specify a Lisp value for the
2059 spacing of each line. The value is a height spec, and it translates
2060 into a Lisp value as described above. However, in this case the
2061 numeric height value specifies the line spacing, rather than the line
2062 height.
2063
2064 On text terminals, the line spacing cannot be altered.
2065
2066 @node Faces
2067 @section Faces
2068 @cindex faces
2069
2070 A @dfn{face} is a collection of graphical attributes for displaying
2071 text: font, foreground color, background color, optional underlining,
2072 etc. Faces control how Emacs displays text in buffers, as well as
2073 other parts of the frame such as the mode line.
2074
2075 @cindex anonymous face
2076 One way to represent a face is as a property list of attributes,
2077 like @code{(:foreground "red" :weight bold)}. Such a list is called
2078 an @dfn{anonymous face}. For example, you can assign an anonymous
2079 face as the value of the @code{face} text property, and Emacs will
2080 display the underlying text with the specified attributes.
2081 @xref{Special Properties}.
2082
2083 @cindex face name
2084 More commonly, a face is referred to via a @dfn{face name}: a Lisp
2085 symbol associated with a set of face attributes@footnote{For backward
2086 compatibility, you can also use a string to specify a face name; that
2087 is equivalent to a Lisp symbol with the same name.}. Named faces are
2088 defined using the @code{defface} macro (@pxref{Defining Faces}).
2089 Emacs comes with several standard named faces (@pxref{Basic Faces}).
2090
2091 Many parts of Emacs required named faces, and do not accept
2092 anonymous faces. These include the functions documented in
2093 @ref{Attribute Functions}, and the variable @code{font-lock-keywords}
2094 (@pxref{Search-based Fontification}). Unless otherwise stated, we
2095 will use the term @dfn{face} to refer only to named faces.
2096
2097 @defun facep object
2098 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if @var{object} is a
2099 named face: a Lisp symbol or string which serves as a face name.
2100 Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2101 @end defun
2102
2103 @menu
2104 * Face Attributes:: What is in a face?
2105 * Defining Faces:: How to define a face.
2106 * Attribute Functions:: Functions to examine and set face attributes.
2107 * Displaying Faces:: How Emacs combines the faces specified for a character.
2108 * Face Remapping:: Remapping faces to alternative definitions.
2109 * Face Functions:: How to define and examine faces.
2110 * Auto Faces:: Hook for automatic face assignment.
2111 * Basic Faces:: Faces that are defined by default.
2112 * Font Selection:: Finding the best available font for a face.
2113 * Font Lookup:: Looking up the names of available fonts
2114 and information about them.
2115 * Fontsets:: A fontset is a collection of fonts
2116 that handle a range of character sets.
2117 * Low-Level Font:: Lisp representation for character display fonts.
2118 @end menu
2119
2120 @node Face Attributes
2121 @subsection Face Attributes
2122 @cindex face attributes
2123
2124 @dfn{Face attributes} determine the visual appearance of a face.
2125 The following table lists all the face attributes, their possible
2126 values, and their effects.
2127
2128 Apart from the values given below, each face attribute can have the
2129 value @code{unspecified}. This special value means that the face
2130 doesn't specify that attribute directly. An @code{unspecified}
2131 attribute tells Emacs to refer instead to a parent face (see the
2132 description @code{:inherit} attribute below); or, failing that, to an
2133 underlying face (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). The @code{default} face
2134 must specify all attributes.
2135
2136 Some of these attributes are meaningful only on certain kinds of
2137 displays. If your display cannot handle a certain attribute, the
2138 attribute is ignored.
2139
2140 @table @code
2141 @item :family
2142 Font family or fontset (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU
2143 Emacs Manual}, for more information about font families. The function
2144 @code{font-family-list} (see below) returns a list of available family
2145 names. @xref{Fontsets}, for information about fontsets.
2146
2147 @item :foundry
2148 The name of the @dfn{font foundry} for the font family specified by
2149 the @code{:family} attribute (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
2150 GNU Emacs Manual}.
2151
2152 @item :width
2153 Relative character width. This should be one of the symbols
2154 @code{ultra-condensed}, @code{extra-condensed}, @code{condensed},
2155 @code{semi-condensed}, @code{normal}, @code{semi-expanded},
2156 @code{expanded}, @code{extra-expanded}, or @code{ultra-expanded}.
2157
2158 @item :height
2159 The height of the font. In the simplest case, this is an integer in
2160 units of 1/10 point.
2161
2162 The value can also be floating point or a function, which
2163 specifies the height relative to an @dfn{underlying face}
2164 (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). A floating-point value
2165 specifies the amount by which to scale the height of the
2166 underlying face. A function value is called
2167 with one argument, the height of the underlying face, and returns the
2168 height of the new face. If the function is passed an integer
2169 argument, it must return an integer.
2170
2171 The height of the default face must be specified using an integer;
2172 floating point and function values are not allowed.
2173
2174 @item :weight
2175 Font weight---one of the symbols (from densest to faintest)
2176 @code{ultra-bold}, @code{extra-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{semi-bold},
2177 @code{normal}, @code{semi-light}, @code{light}, @code{extra-light}, or
2178 @code{ultra-light}. On text terminals which support
2179 variable-brightness text, any weight greater than normal is displayed
2180 as extra bright, and any weight less than normal is displayed as
2181 half-bright.
2182
2183 @cindex italic text
2184 @item :slant
2185 Font slant---one of the symbols @code{italic}, @code{oblique},
2186 @code{normal}, @code{reverse-italic}, or @code{reverse-oblique}. On
2187 text terminals that support variable-brightness text, slanted text is
2188 displayed as half-bright.
2189
2190 @item :foreground
2191 Foreground color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2192 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}. On
2193 black-and-white displays, certain shades of gray are implemented by
2194 stipple patterns.
2195
2196 @item :distant-foreground
2197 Alternative foreground color, a string. This is like @code{:foreground}
2198 but the color is only used as a foreground when the background color is
2199 near to the foreground that would have been used. This is useful for
2200 example when marking text (i.e., the region face). If the text has a foreground
2201 that is visible with the region face, that foreground is used.
2202 If the foreground is near the region face background,
2203 @code{:distant-foreground} is used instead so the text is readable.
2204
2205 @item :background
2206 Background color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2207 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}.
2208
2209 @cindex underlined text
2210 @item :underline
2211 Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what
2212 way. The possible values of the @code{:underline} attribute are:
2213
2214 @table @asis
2215 @item @code{nil}
2216 Don't underline.
2217
2218 @item @code{t}
2219 Underline with the foreground color of the face.
2220
2221 @item @var{color}
2222 Underline in color @var{color}, a string specifying a color.
2223
2224 @item @code{(:color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2225 @var{color} is either a string, or the symbol @code{foreground-color},
2226 meaning the foreground color of the face. Omitting the attribute
2227 @code{:color} means to use the foreground color of the face.
2228 @var{style} should be a symbol @code{line} or @code{wave}, meaning to
2229 use a straight or wavy line. Omitting the attribute @code{:style}
2230 means to use a straight line.
2231 @end table
2232
2233 @cindex overlined text
2234 @item :overline
2235 Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2236 If the value is @code{t}, overlining uses the foreground color of the
2237 face. If the value is a string, overlining uses that color. The
2238 value @code{nil} means do not overline.
2239
2240 @cindex strike-through text
2241 @item :strike-through
2242 Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2243 color. The value is used like that of @code{:overline}.
2244
2245 @cindex 2D box
2246 @cindex 3D box
2247 @item :box
2248 Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its color, the
2249 width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. Here are the possible
2250 values of the @code{:box} attribute, and what they mean:
2251
2252 @table @asis
2253 @item @code{nil}
2254 Don't draw a box.
2255
2256 @item @code{t}
2257 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in the foreground color.
2258
2259 @item @var{color}
2260 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in color @var{color}.
2261
2262 @item @code{(:line-width @var{width} :color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2263 This way you can explicitly specify all aspects of the box. The value
2264 @var{width} specifies the width of the lines to draw; it defaults to
2265 1. A negative width @var{-n} means to draw a line of width @var{n}
2266 that occupies the space of the underlying text, thus avoiding any
2267 increase in the character height or width.
2268
2269 The value @var{color} specifies the color to draw with. The default is
2270 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2271 color of the face for 3D boxes.
2272
2273 The value @var{style} specifies whether to draw a 3D box. If it is
2274 @code{released-button}, the box looks like a 3D button that is not being
2275 pressed. If it is @code{pressed-button}, the box looks like a 3D button
2276 that is being pressed. If it is @code{nil} or omitted, a plain 2D box
2277 is used.
2278 @end table
2279
2280 @item :inverse-video
2281 Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. The
2282 value should be @code{t} (yes) or @code{nil} (no).
2283
2284 @item :stipple
2285 The background stipple, a bitmap.
2286
2287 The value can be a string; that should be the name of a file containing
2288 external-format X bitmap data. The file is found in the directories
2289 listed in the variable @code{x-bitmap-file-path}.
2290
2291 Alternatively, the value can specify the bitmap directly, with a list
2292 of the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height} @var{data})}. Here,
2293 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the size in pixels, and
2294 @var{data} is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap, row by
2295 row. Each row occupies @math{(@var{width} + 7) / 8} consecutive bytes
2296 in the string (which should be a unibyte string for best results).
2297 This means that each row always occupies at least one whole byte.
2298
2299 If the value is @code{nil}, that means use no stipple pattern.
2300
2301 Normally you do not need to set the stipple attribute, because it is
2302 used automatically to handle certain shades of gray.
2303
2304 @item :font
2305 The font used to display the face. Its value should be a font object.
2306 @xref{Low-Level Font}, for information about font objects, font specs,
2307 and font entities.
2308
2309 When specifying this attribute using @code{set-face-attribute}
2310 (@pxref{Attribute Functions}), you may also supply a font spec, a font
2311 entity, or a string. Emacs converts such values to an appropriate
2312 font object, and stores that font object as the actual attribute
2313 value. If you specify a string, the contents of the string should be
2314 a font name (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}); if the
2315 font name is an XLFD containing wildcards, Emacs chooses the first
2316 font matching those wildcards. Specifying this attribute also changes
2317 the values of the @code{:family}, @code{:foundry}, @code{:width},
2318 @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant} attributes.
2319
2320 @cindex inheritance, for faces
2321 @item :inherit
2322 The name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list of face
2323 names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face like
2324 an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying
2325 faces (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). If a list of faces is used,
2326 attributes from faces earlier in the list override those from later
2327 faces.
2328 @end table
2329
2330 @defun font-family-list &optional frame
2331 This function returns a list of available font family names. The
2332 optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on which the text is
2333 to be displayed; if it is @code{nil}, the selected frame is used.
2334 @end defun
2335
2336 @defopt underline-minimum-offset
2337 This variable specifies the minimum distance between the baseline and
2338 the underline, in pixels, when displaying underlined text.
2339 @end defopt
2340
2341 @defopt x-bitmap-file-path
2342 This variable specifies a list of directories for searching
2343 for bitmap files, for the @code{:stipple} attribute.
2344 @end defopt
2345
2346 @defun bitmap-spec-p object
2347 This returns @code{t} if @var{object} is a valid bitmap specification,
2348 suitable for use with @code{:stipple} (see above). It returns
2349 @code{nil} otherwise.
2350 @end defun
2351
2352 @node Defining Faces
2353 @subsection Defining Faces
2354 @cindex defining faces
2355
2356 @cindex face spec
2357 The usual way to define a face is through the @code{defface} macro.
2358 This macro associates a face name (a symbol) with a default @dfn{face
2359 spec}. A face spec is a construct which specifies what attributes a
2360 face should have on any given terminal; for example, a face spec might
2361 specify one foreground color on high-color terminals, and a different
2362 foreground color on low-color terminals.
2363
2364 People are sometimes tempted to create a variable whose value is a
2365 face name. In the vast majority of cases, this is not necessary; the
2366 usual procedure is to define a face with @code{defface}, and then use
2367 its name directly.
2368
2369 @defmac defface face spec doc [keyword value]@dots{}
2370 This macro declares @var{face} as a named face whose default face spec
2371 is given by @var{spec}. You should not quote the symbol @var{face},
2372 and it should not end in @samp{-face} (that would be redundant). The
2373 argument @var{doc} is a documentation string for the face. The
2374 additional @var{keyword} arguments have the same meanings as in
2375 @code{defgroup} and @code{defcustom} (@pxref{Common Keywords}).
2376
2377 If @var{face} already has a default face spec, this macro does
2378 nothing.
2379
2380 The default face spec determines @var{face}'s appearance when no
2381 customizations are in effect (@pxref{Customization}). If @var{face}
2382 has already been customized (via Custom themes or via customizations
2383 read from the init file), its appearance is determined by the custom
2384 face spec(s), which override the default face spec @var{spec}.
2385 However, if the customizations are subsequently removed, the
2386 appearance of @var{face} will again be determined by its default face
2387 spec.
2388
2389 As an exception, if you evaluate a @code{defface} form with
2390 @kbd{C-M-x} in Emacs Lisp mode (@code{eval-defun}), a special feature
2391 of @code{eval-defun} overrides any custom face specs on the face,
2392 causing the face to reflect exactly what the @code{defface} says.
2393
2394 The @var{spec} argument is a @dfn{face spec}, which states how the
2395 face should appear on different kinds of terminals. It should be an
2396 alist whose elements each have the form
2397
2398 @example
2399 (@var{display} . @var{plist})
2400 @end example
2401
2402 @noindent
2403 @var{display} specifies a class of terminals (see below). @var{plist}
2404 is a property list of face attributes and their values, specifying how
2405 the face appears on such terminals. For backward compatibility, you
2406 can also write an element as @code{(@var{display} @var{plist})}.
2407
2408 The @var{display} part of an element of @var{spec} determines which
2409 terminals the element matches. If more than one element of @var{spec}
2410 matches a given terminal, the first element that matches is the one
2411 used for that terminal. There are three possibilities for
2412 @var{display}:
2413
2414 @table @asis
2415 @item @code{default}
2416 This element of @var{spec} doesn't match any terminal; instead, it
2417 specifies defaults that apply to all terminals. This element, if
2418 used, must be the first element of @var{spec}. Each of the following
2419 elements can override any or all of these defaults.
2420
2421 @item @code{t}
2422 This element of @var{spec} matches all terminals. Therefore, any
2423 subsequent elements of @var{spec} are never used. Normally @code{t}
2424 is used in the last (or only) element of @var{spec}.
2425
2426 @item a list
2427 If @var{display} is a list, each element should have the form
2428 @code{(@var{characteristic} @var{value}@dots{})}. Here
2429 @var{characteristic} specifies a way of classifying terminals, and the
2430 @var{value}s are possible classifications which @var{display} should
2431 apply to. Here are the possible values of @var{characteristic}:
2432
2433 @table @code
2434 @item type
2435 The kind of window system the terminal uses---either @code{graphic}
2436 (any graphics-capable display), @code{x}, @code{pc} (for the MS-DOS
2437 console), @code{w32} (for MS Windows 9X/NT/2K/XP), or @code{tty} (a
2438 non-graphics-capable display). @xref{Window Systems, window-system}.
2439
2440 @item class
2441 What kinds of colors the terminal supports---either @code{color},
2442 @code{grayscale}, or @code{mono}.
2443
2444 @item background
2445 The kind of background---either @code{light} or @code{dark}.
2446
2447 @item min-colors
2448 An integer that represents the minimum number of colors the terminal
2449 should support. This matches a terminal if its
2450 @code{display-color-cells} value is at least the specified integer.
2451
2452 @item supports
2453 Whether or not the terminal can display the face attributes given in
2454 @var{value}@dots{} (@pxref{Face Attributes}). @xref{Display Face
2455 Attribute Testing}, for more information on exactly how this testing
2456 is done.
2457 @end table
2458
2459 If an element of @var{display} specifies more than one @var{value} for
2460 a given @var{characteristic}, any of those values is acceptable. If
2461 @var{display} has more than one element, each element should specify a
2462 different @var{characteristic}; then @emph{each} characteristic of the
2463 terminal must match one of the @var{value}s specified for it in
2464 @var{display}.
2465 @end table
2466 @end defmac
2467
2468 For example, here's the definition of the standard face
2469 @code{highlight}:
2470
2471 @example
2472 (defface highlight
2473 '((((class color) (min-colors 88) (background light))
2474 :background "darkseagreen2")
2475 (((class color) (min-colors 88) (background dark))
2476 :background "darkolivegreen")
2477 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background light))
2478 :background "darkseagreen2")
2479 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background dark))
2480 :background "darkolivegreen")
2481 (((class color) (min-colors 8))
2482 :background "green" :foreground "black")
2483 (t :inverse-video t))
2484 "Basic face for highlighting."
2485 :group 'basic-faces)
2486 @end example
2487
2488 Internally, Emacs stores each face's default spec in its
2489 @code{face-defface-spec} symbol property (@pxref{Symbol Properties}).
2490 The @code{saved-face} property stores any face spec saved by the user
2491 using the customization buffer; the @code{customized-face} property
2492 stores the face spec customized for the current session, but not
2493 saved; and the @code{theme-face} property stores an alist associating
2494 the active customization settings and Custom themes with the face
2495 specs for that face. The face's documentation string is stored in the
2496 @code{face-documentation} property.
2497
2498 Normally, a face is declared just once, using @code{defface}, and
2499 any further changes to its appearance are applied using the Customize
2500 framework (e.g., via the Customize user interface or via the
2501 @code{custom-set-faces} function; @pxref{Applying Customizations}), or
2502 by face remapping (@pxref{Face Remapping}). In the rare event that
2503 you need to change a face spec directly from Lisp, you can use the
2504 @code{face-spec-set} function.
2505
2506 @defun face-spec-set face spec &optional spec-type
2507 This function applies @var{spec} as a face spec for @code{face}.
2508 @var{spec} should be a face spec, as described in the above
2509 documentation for @code{defface}.
2510
2511 This function also defines @var{face} as a valid face name if it is
2512 not already one, and (re)calculates its attributes on existing frames.
2513
2514 @cindex override spec @r{(for a face)}
2515 The argument @var{spec-type} determines which spec to set. If it is
2516 @code{nil} or @code{face-override-spec}, this function sets the
2517 @dfn{override spec}, which overrides over all other face specs on
2518 @var{face}. If it is @code{customized-face} or @code{saved-face},
2519 this function sets the customized spec or the saved custom spec. If
2520 it is @code{face-defface-spec}, this function sets the default face
2521 spec (the same one set by @code{defface}). If it is @code{reset},
2522 this function clears out all customization specs and override specs
2523 from @var{face} (in this case, the value of @var{spec} is ignored).
2524 Any other value of @var{spec-type} is reserved for internal use.
2525 @end defun
2526
2527 @node Attribute Functions
2528 @subsection Face Attribute Functions
2529 @cindex face attributes, access and modification
2530
2531 This section describes functions for directly accessing and
2532 modifying the attributes of a named face.
2533
2534 @defun face-attribute face attribute &optional frame inherit
2535 This function returns the value of the @var{attribute} attribute for
2536 @var{face} on @var{frame}.
2537
2538 If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, that means the selected frame
2539 (@pxref{Input Focus}). If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function
2540 returns the value of the specified attribute for newly-created frames
2541 (this is normally @code{unspecified}, unless you have specified some
2542 value using @code{set-face-attribute}; see below).
2543
2544 If @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only attributes directly defined by
2545 @var{face} are considered, so the return value may be
2546 @code{unspecified}, or a relative value. If @var{inherit} is
2547 non-@code{nil}, @var{face}'s definition of @var{attribute} is merged
2548 with the faces specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute; however the
2549 return value may still be @code{unspecified} or relative. If
2550 @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then the result is further
2551 merged with that face (or faces), until it becomes specified and
2552 absolute.
2553
2554 To ensure that the return value is always specified and absolute, use
2555 a value of @code{default} for @var{inherit}; this will resolve any
2556 unspecified or relative values by merging with the @code{default} face
2557 (which is always completely specified).
2558
2559 For example,
2560
2561 @example
2562 (face-attribute 'bold :weight)
2563 @result{} bold
2564 @end example
2565 @end defun
2566
2567 @c FIXME: Add an index for "relative face attribute", maybe here? --xfq
2568 @defun face-attribute-relative-p attribute value
2569 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{value}, when used as the
2570 value of the face attribute @var{attribute}, is relative. This means
2571 it would modify, rather than completely override, any value that comes
2572 from a subsequent face in the face list or that is inherited from
2573 another face.
2574
2575 @code{unspecified} is a relative value for all attributes. For
2576 @code{:height}, floating point and function values are also relative.
2577
2578 For example:
2579
2580 @example
2581 (face-attribute-relative-p :height 2.0)
2582 @result{} t
2583 @end example
2584 @end defun
2585
2586 @defun face-all-attributes face &optional frame
2587 This function returns an alist of attributes of @var{face}. The
2588 elements of the result are name-value pairs of the form
2589 @w{@code{(@var{attr-name} . @var{attr-value})}}. Optional argument
2590 @var{frame} specifies the frame whose definition of @var{face} to
2591 return; if omitted or @code{nil}, the returned value describes the
2592 default attributes of @var{face} for newly created frames.
2593 @end defun
2594
2595 @defun merge-face-attribute attribute value1 value2
2596 If @var{value1} is a relative value for the face attribute
2597 @var{attribute}, returns it merged with the underlying value
2598 @var{value2}; otherwise, if @var{value1} is an absolute value for the
2599 face attribute @var{attribute}, returns @var{value1} unchanged.
2600 @end defun
2601
2602 Normally, Emacs uses the face specs of each face to automatically
2603 calculate its attributes on each frame (@pxref{Defining Faces}). The
2604 function @code{set-face-attribute} can override this calculation by
2605 directly assigning attributes to a face, either on a specific frame or
2606 for all frames. This function is mostly intended for internal usage.
2607
2608 @defun set-face-attribute face frame &rest arguments
2609 This function sets one or more attributes of @var{face} for
2610 @var{frame}. The attributes specifies in this way override the face
2611 spec(s) belonging to @var{face}.
2612
2613 The extra arguments @var{arguments} specify the attributes to set, and
2614 the values for them. They should consist of alternating attribute
2615 names (such as @code{:family} or @code{:underline}) and values. Thus,
2616
2617 @example
2618 (set-face-attribute 'foo nil :weight 'bold :slant 'italic)
2619 @end example
2620
2621 @noindent
2622 sets the attribute @code{:weight} to @code{bold} and the attribute
2623 @code{:slant} to @code{italic}.
2624
2625
2626 If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function sets the default attributes
2627 for newly created frames. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, this function
2628 sets the attributes for all existing frames, as well as for newly
2629 created frames.
2630 @end defun
2631
2632 The following commands and functions mostly provide compatibility
2633 with old versions of Emacs. They work by calling
2634 @code{set-face-attribute}. Values of @code{t} and @code{nil} for
2635 their @var{frame} argument are handled just like
2636 @code{set-face-attribute} and @code{face-attribute}. The commands
2637 read their arguments using the minibuffer, if called interactively.
2638
2639 @deffn Command set-face-foreground face color &optional frame
2640 @deffnx Command set-face-background face color &optional frame
2641 These set the @code{:foreground} attribute (or @code{:background}
2642 attribute, respectively) of @var{face} to @var{color}.
2643 @end deffn
2644
2645 @deffn Command set-face-stipple face pattern &optional frame
2646 This sets the @code{:stipple} attribute of @var{face} to
2647 @var{pattern}.
2648 @end deffn
2649
2650 @deffn Command set-face-font face font &optional frame
2651 This sets the @code{:font} attribute of @var{face} to @var{font}.
2652 @end deffn
2653
2654 @defun set-face-bold face bold-p &optional frame
2655 This sets the @code{:weight} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal}
2656 if @var{bold-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{bold} otherwise.
2657 @end defun
2658
2659 @defun set-face-italic face italic-p &optional frame
2660 This sets the @code{:slant} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal} if
2661 @var{italic-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{italic} otherwise.
2662 @end defun
2663
2664 @defun set-face-underline face underline &optional frame
2665 This sets the @code{:underline} attribute of @var{face} to
2666 @var{underline}.
2667 @end defun
2668
2669 @defun set-face-inverse-video face inverse-video-p &optional frame
2670 This sets the @code{:inverse-video} attribute of @var{face} to
2671 @var{inverse-video-p}.
2672 @end defun
2673
2674 @deffn Command invert-face face &optional frame
2675 This swaps the foreground and background colors of face @var{face}.
2676 @end deffn
2677
2678 The following functions examine the attributes of a face. They
2679 mostly provide compatibility with old versions of Emacs. If you don't
2680 specify @var{frame}, they refer to the selected frame; @code{t} refers
2681 to the default data for new frames. They return @code{unspecified} if
2682 the face doesn't define any value for that attribute. If
2683 @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only an attribute directly defined by the
2684 face is returned. If @var{inherit} is non-@code{nil}, any faces
2685 specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute are considered as well, and
2686 if @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then they are also
2687 considered, until a specified attribute is found. To ensure that the
2688 return value is always specified, use a value of @code{default} for
2689 @var{inherit}.
2690
2691 @defun face-font face &optional frame character
2692 This function returns the name of the font of face @var{face}.
2693
2694 If the optional argument @var{frame} is specified, it returns the name
2695 of the font of @var{face} for that frame. If @var{frame} is omitted or
2696 @code{nil}, the selected frame is used. And, in this case, if the
2697 optional third argument @var{character} is supplied, it returns the font
2698 name used for @var{character}.
2699 @end defun
2700
2701 @defun face-foreground face &optional frame inherit
2702 @defunx face-background face &optional frame inherit
2703 These functions return the foreground color (or background color,
2704 respectively) of face @var{face}, as a string.
2705 @end defun
2706
2707 @defun face-stipple face &optional frame inherit
2708 This function returns the name of the background stipple pattern of face
2709 @var{face}, or @code{nil} if it doesn't have one.
2710 @end defun
2711
2712 @defun face-bold-p face &optional frame inherit
2713 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:weight}
2714 attribute of @var{face} is bolder than normal (i.e., one of
2715 @code{semi-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{extra-bold}, or
2716 @code{ultra-bold}). Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2717 @end defun
2718
2719 @defun face-italic-p face &optional frame inherit
2720 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:slant}
2721 attribute of @var{face} is @code{italic} or @code{oblique}, and
2722 @code{nil} otherwise.
2723 @end defun
2724
2725 @defun face-underline-p face &optional frame inherit
2726 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2727 a non-@code{nil} @code{:underline} attribute.
2728 @end defun
2729
2730 @defun face-inverse-video-p face &optional frame inherit
2731 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2732 a non-@code{nil} @code{:inverse-video} attribute.
2733 @end defun
2734
2735 @node Displaying Faces
2736 @subsection Displaying Faces
2737 @cindex displaying faces
2738 @cindex face merging
2739
2740 When Emacs displays a given piece of text, the visual appearance of
2741 the text may be determined by faces drawn from different sources. If
2742 these various sources together specify more than one face for a
2743 particular character, Emacs merges the attributes of the various
2744 faces. Here is the order in which Emacs merges the faces, from
2745 highest to lowest priority:
2746
2747 @itemize @bullet
2748 @item
2749 If the text consists of a special glyph, the glyph can specify a
2750 particular face. @xref{Glyphs}.
2751
2752 @item
2753 If the text lies within an active region, Emacs highlights it using
2754 the @code{region} face. @xref{Standard Faces,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
2755 Manual}.
2756
2757 @item
2758 If the text lies within an overlay with a non-@code{nil} @code{face}
2759 property, Emacs applies the face(s) specified by that property. If
2760 the overlay has a @code{mouse-face} property and the mouse is near
2761 enough to the overlay, Emacs applies the face or face attributes
2762 specified by the @code{mouse-face} property instead. @xref{Overlay
2763 Properties}.
2764
2765 When multiple overlays cover one character, an overlay with higher
2766 priority overrides those with lower priority. @xref{Overlays}.
2767
2768 @item
2769 If the text contains a @code{face} or @code{mouse-face} property,
2770 Emacs applies the specified faces and face attributes. @xref{Special
2771 Properties}. (This is how Font Lock mode faces are applied.
2772 @xref{Font Lock Mode}.)
2773
2774 @item
2775 If the text lies within the mode line of the selected window, Emacs
2776 applies the @code{mode-line} face. For the mode line of a
2777 non-selected window, Emacs applies the @code{mode-line-inactive} face.
2778 For a header line, Emacs applies the @code{header-line} face.
2779
2780 @item
2781 If any given attribute has not been specified during the preceding
2782 steps, Emacs applies the attribute of the @code{default} face.
2783 @end itemize
2784
2785 At each stage, if a face has a valid @code{:inherit} attribute,
2786 Emacs treats any attribute with an @code{unspecified} value as having
2787 the corresponding value drawn from the parent face(s). @pxref{Face
2788 Attributes}. Note that the parent face(s) may also leave the
2789 attribute unspecified; in that case, the attribute remains unspecified
2790 at the next level of face merging.
2791
2792 @node Face Remapping
2793 @subsection Face Remapping
2794 @cindex face remapping
2795
2796 The variable @code{face-remapping-alist} is used for buffer-local or
2797 global changes in the appearance of a face. For instance, it is used
2798 to implement the @code{text-scale-adjust} command (@pxref{Text
2799 Scale,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
2800
2801 @defvar face-remapping-alist
2802 The value of this variable is an alist whose elements have the form
2803 @code{(@var{face} . @var{remapping})}. This causes Emacs to display
2804 any text having the face @var{face} with @var{remapping}, rather than
2805 the ordinary definition of @var{face}.
2806
2807 @var{remapping} may be any face spec suitable for a @code{face} text
2808 property: either a face (i.e., a face name or a property list of
2809 attribute/value pairs), or a list of faces. For details, see the
2810 description of the @code{face} text property in @ref{Special
2811 Properties}. @var{remapping} serves as the complete specification for
2812 the remapped face---it replaces the normal definition of @var{face},
2813 instead of modifying it.
2814
2815 If @code{face-remapping-alist} is buffer-local, its local value takes
2816 effect only within that buffer.
2817
2818 Note: face remapping is non-recursive. If @var{remapping} references
2819 the same face name @var{face}, either directly or via the
2820 @code{:inherit} attribute of some other face in @var{remapping}, that
2821 reference uses the normal definition of @var{face}. For instance, if
2822 the @code{mode-line} face is remapped using this entry in
2823 @code{face-remapping-alist}:
2824
2825 @example
2826 (mode-line italic mode-line)
2827 @end example
2828
2829 @noindent
2830 then the new definition of the @code{mode-line} face inherits from the
2831 @code{italic} face, and the @emph{normal} (non-remapped) definition of
2832 @code{mode-line} face.
2833 @end defvar
2834
2835 @cindex relative remapping, faces
2836 @cindex base remapping, faces
2837 The following functions implement a higher-level interface to
2838 @code{face-remapping-alist}. Most Lisp code should use these
2839 functions instead of setting @code{face-remapping-alist} directly, to
2840 avoid trampling on remappings applied elsewhere. These functions are
2841 intended for buffer-local remappings, so they all make
2842 @code{face-remapping-alist} buffer-local as a side-effect. They manage
2843 @code{face-remapping-alist} entries of the form
2844
2845 @example
2846 (@var{face} @var{relative-spec-1} @var{relative-spec-2} @var{...} @var{base-spec})
2847 @end example
2848
2849 @noindent
2850 where, as explained above, each of the @var{relative-spec-N} and
2851 @var{base-spec} is either a face name, or a property list of
2852 attribute/value pairs. Each of the @dfn{relative remapping} entries,
2853 @var{relative-spec-N}, is managed by the
2854 @code{face-remap-add-relative} and @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2855 functions; these are intended for simple modifications like changing
2856 the text size. The @dfn{base remapping} entry, @var{base-spec}, has
2857 the lowest priority and is managed by the @code{face-remap-set-base}
2858 and @code{face-remap-reset-base} functions; it is intended for major
2859 modes to remap faces in the buffers they control.
2860
2861 @defun face-remap-add-relative face &rest specs
2862 This function adds the face spec in @var{specs} as relative
2863 remappings for face @var{face} in the current buffer. The remaining
2864 arguments, @var{specs}, should form either a list of face names, or a
2865 property list of attribute/value pairs.
2866
2867 The return value is a Lisp object that serves as a cookie; you can
2868 pass this object as an argument to @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2869 if you need to remove the remapping later.
2870
2871 @example
2872 ;; Remap the 'escape-glyph' face into a combination
2873 ;; of the 'highlight' and 'italic' faces:
2874 (face-remap-add-relative 'escape-glyph 'highlight 'italic)
2875
2876 ;; Increase the size of the 'default' face by 50%:
2877 (face-remap-add-relative 'default :height 1.5)
2878 @end example
2879 @end defun
2880
2881 @defun face-remap-remove-relative cookie
2882 This function removes a relative remapping previously added by
2883 @code{face-remap-add-relative}. @var{cookie} should be the Lisp
2884 object returned by @code{face-remap-add-relative} when the remapping
2885 was added.
2886 @end defun
2887
2888 @defun face-remap-set-base face &rest specs
2889 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} in the current
2890 buffer to @var{specs}. If @var{specs} is empty, the default base
2891 remapping is restored, similar to calling @code{face-remap-reset-base}
2892 (see below); note that this is different from @var{specs} containing a
2893 single value @code{nil}, which has the opposite result (the global
2894 definition of @var{face} is ignored).
2895
2896 This overwrites the default @var{base-spec}, which inherits the global
2897 face definition, so it is up to the caller to add such inheritance if
2898 so desired.
2899 @end defun
2900
2901 @defun face-remap-reset-base face
2902 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} to its default
2903 value, which inherits from @var{face}'s global definition.
2904 @end defun
2905
2906 @node Face Functions
2907 @subsection Functions for Working with Faces
2908
2909 Here are additional functions for creating and working with faces.
2910
2911 @defun face-list
2912 This function returns a list of all defined face names.
2913 @end defun
2914
2915 @defun face-id face
2916 This function returns the @dfn{face number} of face @var{face}. This
2917 is a number that uniquely identifies a face at low levels within
2918 Emacs. It is seldom necessary to refer to a face by its face number.
2919 @end defun
2920
2921 @defun face-documentation face
2922 This function returns the documentation string of face @var{face}, or
2923 @code{nil} if none was specified for it.
2924 @end defun
2925
2926 @defun face-equal face1 face2 &optional frame
2927 This returns @code{t} if the faces @var{face1} and @var{face2} have the
2928 same attributes for display.
2929 @end defun
2930
2931 @defun face-differs-from-default-p face &optional frame
2932 This returns non-@code{nil} if the face @var{face} displays
2933 differently from the default face.
2934 @end defun
2935
2936 @cindex face alias
2937 @cindex alias, for faces
2938 A @dfn{face alias} provides an equivalent name for a face. You can
2939 define a face alias by giving the alias symbol the @code{face-alias}
2940 property, with a value of the target face name. The following example
2941 makes @code{modeline} an alias for the @code{mode-line} face.
2942
2943 @example
2944 (put 'modeline 'face-alias 'mode-line)
2945 @end example
2946
2947 @defmac define-obsolete-face-alias obsolete-face current-face when
2948 This macro defines @code{obsolete-face} as an alias for
2949 @var{current-face}, and also marks it as obsolete, indicating that it
2950 may be removed in future. @var{when} should be a string indicating
2951 when @code{obsolete-face} was made obsolete (usually a version number
2952 string).
2953 @end defmac
2954
2955 @node Auto Faces
2956 @subsection Automatic Face Assignment
2957 @cindex automatic face assignment
2958 @cindex faces, automatic choice
2959
2960 This hook is used for automatically assigning faces to text in the
2961 buffer. It is part of the implementation of Jit-Lock mode, used by
2962 Font-Lock.
2963
2964 @defvar fontification-functions
2965 This variable holds a list of functions that are called by Emacs
2966 redisplay as needed, just before doing redisplay. They are called even
2967 when Font Lock Mode isn't enabled. When Font Lock Mode is enabled, this
2968 variable usually holds just one function, @code{jit-lock-function}.
2969
2970 The functions are called in the order listed, with one argument, a
2971 buffer position @var{pos}. Collectively they should attempt to assign
2972 faces to the text in the current buffer starting at @var{pos}.
2973
2974 The functions should record the faces they assign by setting the
2975 @code{face} property. They should also add a non-@code{nil}
2976 @code{fontified} property to all the text they have assigned faces to.
2977 That property tells redisplay that faces have been assigned to that text
2978 already.
2979
2980 It is probably a good idea for the functions to do nothing if the
2981 character after @var{pos} already has a non-@code{nil} @code{fontified}
2982 property, but this is not required. If one function overrides the
2983 assignments made by a previous one, the properties after the last
2984 function finishes are the ones that really matter.
2985
2986 For efficiency, we recommend writing these functions so that they
2987 usually assign faces to around 400 to 600 characters at each call.
2988 @end defvar
2989
2990 @node Basic Faces
2991 @subsection Basic Faces
2992 @cindex basic faces
2993
2994 If your Emacs Lisp program needs to assign some faces to text, it is
2995 often a good idea to use certain existing faces or inherit from them,
2996 rather than defining entirely new faces. This way, if other users
2997 have customized the basic faces to give Emacs a certain look, your
2998 program will fit in without additional customization.
2999
3000 Some of the basic faces defined in Emacs are listed below. In
3001 addition to these, you might want to make use of the Font Lock faces
3002 for syntactic highlighting, if highlighting is not already handled by
3003 Font Lock mode, or if some Font Lock faces are not in use.
3004 @xref{Faces for Font Lock}.
3005
3006 @table @code
3007 @item default
3008 The default face, whose attributes are all specified. All other faces
3009 implicitly inherit from it: any unspecified attribute defaults to the
3010 attribute on this face (@pxref{Face Attributes}).
3011
3012 @item bold
3013 @itemx italic
3014 @itemx bold-italic
3015 @itemx underline
3016 @itemx fixed-pitch
3017 @itemx variable-pitch
3018 These have the attributes indicated by their names (e.g., @code{bold}
3019 has a bold @code{:weight} attribute), with all other attributes
3020 unspecified (and so given by @code{default}).
3021
3022 @item shadow
3023 For dimmed-out text. For example, it is used for the ignored
3024 part of a filename in the minibuffer (@pxref{Minibuffer File,,
3025 Minibuffers for File Names, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
3026
3027 @item link
3028 @itemx link-visited
3029 For clickable text buttons that send the user to a different
3030 buffer or location.
3031
3032 @item highlight
3033 For stretches of text that should temporarily stand out. For example,
3034 it is commonly assigned to the @code{mouse-face} property for cursor
3035 highlighting (@pxref{Special Properties}).
3036
3037 @item match
3038 @itemx isearch
3039 @itemx lazy-highlight
3040 For text matching (respectively) permanent search matches, interactive
3041 search matches, and lazy highlighting other matches than the current
3042 interactive one.
3043
3044 @item error
3045 @itemx warning
3046 @itemx success
3047 For text concerning errors, warnings, or successes. For example,
3048 these are used for messages in @file{*Compilation*} buffers.
3049 @end table
3050
3051 @node Font Selection
3052 @subsection Font Selection
3053 @cindex font selection
3054 @cindex selecting a font
3055
3056 Before Emacs can draw a character on a graphical display, it must
3057 select a @dfn{font} for that character@footnote{In this context, the
3058 term @dfn{font} has nothing to do with Font Lock (@pxref{Font Lock
3059 Mode}).}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. Normally,
3060 Emacs automatically chooses a font based on the faces assigned to that
3061 character---specifically, the face attributes @code{:family},
3062 @code{:weight}, @code{:slant}, and @code{:width} (@pxref{Face
3063 Attributes}). The choice of font also depends on the character to be
3064 displayed; some fonts can only display a limited set of characters.
3065 If no available font exactly fits the requirements, Emacs looks for
3066 the @dfn{closest matching font}. The variables in this section
3067 control how Emacs makes this selection.
3068
3069 @defopt face-font-family-alternatives
3070 If a given family is specified but does not exist, this variable
3071 specifies alternative font families to try. Each element should have
3072 this form:
3073
3074 @example
3075 (@var{family} @var{alternate-families}@dots{})
3076 @end example
3077
3078 If @var{family} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other
3079 families given in @var{alternate-families}, one by one, until it finds a
3080 family that does exist.
3081 @end defopt
3082
3083 @defopt face-font-selection-order
3084 If there is no font that exactly matches all desired face attributes
3085 (@code{:width}, @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}),
3086 this variable specifies the order in which these attributes should be
3087 considered when selecting the closest matching font. The value should
3088 be a list containing those four attribute symbols, in order of
3089 decreasing importance. The default is @code{(:width :height :weight
3090 :slant)}.
3091
3092 Font selection first finds the best available matches for the first
3093 attribute in the list; then, among the fonts which are best in that
3094 way, it searches for the best matches in the second attribute, and so
3095 on.
3096
3097 The attributes @code{:weight} and @code{:width} have symbolic values in
3098 a range centered around @code{normal}. Matches that are more extreme
3099 (farther from @code{normal}) are somewhat preferred to matches that are
3100 less extreme (closer to @code{normal}); this is designed to ensure that
3101 non-normal faces contrast with normal ones, whenever possible.
3102
3103 One example of a case where this variable makes a difference is when the
3104 default font has no italic equivalent. With the default ordering, the
3105 @code{italic} face will use a non-italic font that is similar to the
3106 default one. But if you put @code{:slant} before @code{:height}, the
3107 @code{italic} face will use an italic font, even if its height is not
3108 quite right.
3109 @end defopt
3110
3111 @defopt face-font-registry-alternatives
3112 This variable lets you specify alternative font registries to try, if a
3113 given registry is specified and doesn't exist. Each element should have
3114 this form:
3115
3116 @example
3117 (@var{registry} @var{alternate-registries}@dots{})
3118 @end example
3119
3120 If @var{registry} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the
3121 other registries given in @var{alternate-registries}, one by one,
3122 until it finds a registry that does exist.
3123 @end defopt
3124
3125 @cindex scalable fonts
3126 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts, but by default it does not use
3127 them.
3128
3129 @defopt scalable-fonts-allowed
3130 This variable controls which scalable fonts to use. A value of
3131 @code{nil}, the default, means do not use scalable fonts. @code{t}
3132 means to use any scalable font that seems appropriate for the text.
3133
3134 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. Then a
3135 scalable font is enabled for use if its name matches any regular
3136 expression in the list. For example,
3137
3138 @example
3139 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("iso10646-1$"))
3140 @end example
3141
3142 @noindent
3143 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry @code{iso10646-1}.
3144 @end defopt
3145
3146 @defvar face-font-rescale-alist
3147 This variable specifies scaling for certain faces. Its value should
3148 be a list of elements of the form
3149
3150 @example
3151 (@var{fontname-regexp} . @var{scale-factor})
3152 @end example
3153
3154 If @var{fontname-regexp} matches the font name that is about to be
3155 used, this says to choose a larger similar font according to the
3156 factor @var{scale-factor}. You would use this feature to normalize
3157 the font size if certain fonts are bigger or smaller than their
3158 nominal heights and widths would suggest.
3159 @end defvar
3160
3161 @node Font Lookup
3162 @subsection Looking Up Fonts
3163 @cindex font lookup
3164 @cindex looking up fonts
3165
3166 @defun x-list-fonts name &optional reference-face frame maximum width
3167 This function returns a list of available font names that match
3168 @var{name}. @var{name} should be a string containing a font name in
3169 either the Fontconfig, GTK, or XLFD format (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
3170 GNU Emacs Manual}). Within an XLFD string, wildcard characters may be
3171 used: the @samp{*} character matches any substring, and the @samp{?}
3172 character matches any single character. Case is ignored when matching
3173 font names.
3174
3175 If the optional arguments @var{reference-face} and @var{frame} are
3176 specified, the returned list includes only fonts that are the same
3177 size as @var{reference-face} (a face name) currently is on the frame
3178 @var{frame}.
3179
3180 The optional argument @var{maximum} sets a limit on how many fonts to
3181 return. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the return value is truncated
3182 after the first @var{maximum} matching fonts. Specifying a small
3183 value for @var{maximum} can make this function much faster, in cases
3184 where many fonts match the pattern.
3185
3186 The optional argument @var{width} specifies a desired font width. If
3187 it is non-@code{nil}, the function only returns those fonts whose
3188 characters are (on average) @var{width} times as wide as
3189 @var{reference-face}.
3190 @end defun
3191
3192 @defun x-family-fonts &optional family frame
3193 This function returns a list describing the available fonts for family
3194 @var{family} on @var{frame}. If @var{family} is omitted or @code{nil},
3195 this list applies to all families, and therefore, it contains all
3196 available fonts. Otherwise, @var{family} must be a string; it may
3197 contain the wildcards @samp{?} and @samp{*}.
3198
3199 The list describes the display that @var{frame} is on; if @var{frame} is
3200 omitted or @code{nil}, it applies to the selected frame's display
3201 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
3202
3203 Each element in the list is a vector of the following form:
3204
3205 @example
3206 [@var{family} @var{width} @var{point-size} @var{weight} @var{slant}
3207 @var{fixed-p} @var{full} @var{registry-and-encoding}]
3208 @end example
3209
3210 The first five elements correspond to face attributes; if you
3211 specify these attributes for a face, it will use this font.
3212
3213 The last three elements give additional information about the font.
3214 @var{fixed-p} is non-@code{nil} if the font is fixed-pitch.
3215 @var{full} is the full name of the font, and
3216 @var{registry-and-encoding} is a string giving the registry and
3217 encoding of the font.
3218 @end defun
3219
3220 @node Fontsets
3221 @subsection Fontsets
3222 @cindex fontset
3223
3224 A @dfn{fontset} is a list of fonts, each assigned to a range of
3225 character codes. An individual font cannot display the whole range of
3226 characters that Emacs supports, but a fontset can. Fontsets have names,
3227 just as fonts do, and you can use a fontset name in place of a font name
3228 when you specify the font for a frame or a face. Here is
3229 information about defining a fontset under Lisp program control.
3230
3231 @defun create-fontset-from-fontset-spec fontset-spec &optional style-variant-p noerror
3232 This function defines a new fontset according to the specification
3233 string @var{fontset-spec}. The string should have this format:
3234
3235 @smallexample
3236 @var{fontpattern}, @r{[}@var{charset}:@var{font}@r{]@dots{}}
3237 @end smallexample
3238
3239 @noindent
3240 Whitespace characters before and after the commas are ignored.
3241
3242 The first part of the string, @var{fontpattern}, should have the form of
3243 a standard X font name, except that the last two fields should be
3244 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}.
3245
3246 The new fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is
3247 @var{fontpattern} in its entirety. The short name is
3248 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}. You can refer to the fontset by either
3249 name. If a fontset with the same name already exists, an error is
3250 signaled, unless @var{noerror} is non-@code{nil}, in which case this
3251 function does nothing.
3252
3253 If optional argument @var{style-variant-p} is non-@code{nil}, that says
3254 to create bold, italic and bold-italic variants of the fontset as well.
3255 These variant fontsets do not have a short name, only a long one, which
3256 is made by altering @var{fontpattern} to indicate the bold and/or italic
3257 status.
3258
3259 The specification string also says which fonts to use in the fontset.
3260 See below for the details.
3261 @end defun
3262
3263 The construct @samp{@var{charset}:@var{font}} specifies which font to
3264 use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here,
3265 @var{charset} is the name of a character set, and @var{font} is the font
3266 to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of
3267 times in the specification string.
3268
3269 For the remaining character sets, those that you don't specify
3270 explicitly, Emacs chooses a font based on @var{fontpattern}: it replaces
3271 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} with a value that names one character set.
3272 For the @acronym{ASCII} character set, @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} is replaced
3273 with @samp{ISO8859-1}.
3274
3275 In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs
3276 collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of
3277 auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable
3278 for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is
3279 better to use the smaller font in its own size, which Emacs does.
3280
3281 Thus if @var{fontpattern} is this,
3282
3283 @example
3284 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
3285 @end example
3286
3287 @noindent
3288 the font specification for @acronym{ASCII} characters would be this:
3289
3290 @example
3291 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
3292 @end example
3293
3294 @noindent
3295 and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:
3296
3297 @example
3298 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3299 @end example
3300
3301 You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font
3302 specification. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that
3303 have @samp{song ti} or @samp{fangsong ti} in the @var{family} field. In
3304 such a case, @samp{Fontset-@var{n}} can be specified as below:
3305
3306 @smallexample
3307 Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\
3308 chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3309 @end smallexample
3310
3311 @noindent
3312 Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have
3313 @samp{fixed} in the @var{family} field, and the font specification for
3314 Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card @samp{*} in the @var{family}
3315 field.
3316
3317 @defun set-fontset-font name character font-spec &optional frame add
3318 This function modifies the existing fontset @var{name} to use the font
3319 matching with @var{font-spec} for the specified @var{character}.
3320
3321 If @var{name} is @code{nil}, this function modifies the fontset of the
3322 selected frame or that of @var{frame} if @var{frame} is not
3323 @code{nil}.
3324
3325 If @var{name} is @code{t}, this function modifies the default
3326 fontset, whose short name is @samp{fontset-default}.
3327
3328 In addition to specifying a single codepoint, @var{character} may be a
3329 cons @code{(@var{from} . @var{to})}, where @var{from} and @var{to} are
3330 character codepoints. In that case, use @var{font-spec} for all the
3331 characters in the range @var{from} and @var{to} (inclusive).
3332
3333 @var{character} may be a charset. In that case, use
3334 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3335
3336 @var{character} may be a script name. In that case, use
3337 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3338
3339 @var{font-spec} may be a font-spec object created by the function
3340 @code{font-spec} (@pxref{Low-Level Font}).
3341
3342 @var{font-spec} may be a cons; @code{(@var{family} . @var{registry})},
3343 where @var{family} is a family name of a font (possibly including a
3344 foundry name at the head), @var{registry} is a registry name of a font
3345 (possibly including an encoding name at the tail).
3346
3347 @var{font-spec} may be a font name string.
3348
3349 @var{font-spec} may be @code{nil}, which explicitly specifies that
3350 there's no font for the specified @var{character}. This is useful,
3351 for example, to avoid expensive system-wide search for fonts for
3352 characters that have no glyphs, like those from the Unicode Private
3353 Use Area (PUA).
3354
3355 The optional argument @var{add}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies how to
3356 add @var{font-spec} to the font specifications previously set. If it
3357 is @code{prepend}, @var{font-spec} is prepended. If it is
3358 @code{append}, @var{font-spec} is appended. By default,
3359 @var{font-spec} overrides the previous settings.
3360
3361 For instance, this changes the default fontset to use a font of which
3362 family name is @samp{Kochi Gothic} for all characters belonging to
3363 the charset @code{japanese-jisx0208}.
3364
3365 @smallexample
3366 (set-fontset-font t 'japanese-jisx0208
3367 (font-spec :family "Kochi Gothic"))
3368 @end smallexample
3369 @end defun
3370
3371 @defun char-displayable-p char
3372 This function returns @code{t} if Emacs ought to be able to display
3373 @var{char}. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has a
3374 font to display the character set that @var{char} belongs to.
3375
3376 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3377 does that, this function's value may not be accurate.
3378 @end defun
3379
3380 @node Low-Level Font
3381 @subsection Low-Level Font Representation
3382 @cindex font property
3383
3384 Normally, it is not necessary to manipulate fonts directly. In case
3385 you need to do so, this section explains how.
3386
3387 In Emacs Lisp, fonts are represented using three different Lisp
3388 object types: @dfn{font objects}, @dfn{font specs}, and @dfn{font
3389 entities}.
3390
3391 @defun fontp object &optional type
3392 Return @code{t} if @var{object} is a font object, font spec, or font
3393 entity. Otherwise, return @code{nil}.
3394
3395 The optional argument @var{type}, if non-@code{nil}, determines the
3396 exact type of Lisp object to check for. In that case, @var{type}
3397 should be one of @code{font-object}, @code{font-spec}, or
3398 @code{font-entity}.
3399 @end defun
3400
3401 @cindex font object
3402 A font object is a Lisp object that represents a font that Emacs has
3403 @dfn{opened}. Font objects cannot be modified in Lisp, but they can
3404 be inspected.
3405
3406 @defun font-at position &optional window string
3407 Return the font object that is being used to display the character at
3408 position @var{position} in the window @var{window}. If @var{window}
3409 is @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected window. If @var{string} is
3410 @code{nil}, @var{position} specifies a position in the current buffer;
3411 otherwise, @var{string} should be a string, and @var{position}
3412 specifies a position in that string.
3413 @end defun
3414
3415 @cindex font spec
3416 A font spec is a Lisp object that contains a set of specifications
3417 that can be used to find a font. More than one font may match the
3418 specifications in a font spec.
3419
3420 @defun font-spec &rest arguments
3421 Return a new font spec using the specifications in @var{arguments},
3422 which should come in @code{property}-@code{value} pairs. The possible
3423 specifications are as follows:
3424
3425 @table @code
3426 @item :name
3427 The font name (a string), in either XLFD, Fontconfig, or GTK format.
3428 @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
3429
3430 @item :family
3431 @itemx :foundry
3432 @itemx :weight
3433 @itemx :slant
3434 @itemx :width
3435 These have the same meanings as the face attributes of the same name.
3436 @xref{Face Attributes}.
3437
3438 @item :size
3439 The font size---either a non-negative integer that specifies the pixel
3440 size, or a floating-point number that specifies the point size.
3441
3442 @item :adstyle
3443 Additional typographic style information for the font, such as
3444 @samp{sans}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3445
3446 @cindex font registry
3447 @item :registry
3448 The charset registry and encoding of the font, such as
3449 @samp{iso8859-1}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3450
3451 @item :script
3452 The script that the font must support (a symbol).
3453
3454 @item :lang
3455 The language that the font should support. The value should be a
3456 symbol whose name is a two-letter ISO-639 language name. On X, the
3457 value is matched against the ``Additional Style'' field of the XLFD
3458 name of a font, if it is non-empty. On MS-Windows, fonts matching the
3459 spec are required to support codepages needed for the language.
3460 Currently, only a small set of CJK languages is supported with this
3461 property: @samp{ja}, @samp{ko}, and @samp{zh}.
3462
3463 @item :otf
3464 @cindex OpenType font
3465 The font must be an OpenType font that supports these OpenType
3466 features, provided Emacs is compiled with a library, such as
3467 @samp{libotf} on GNU/Linux, that supports complex text layout for
3468 scripts which need that. The value must be a list of the form
3469
3470 @smallexample
3471 @code{(@var{script-tag} @var{langsys-tag} @var{gsub} @var{gpos})}
3472 @end smallexample
3473
3474 where @var{script-tag} is the OpenType script tag symbol;
3475 @var{langsys-tag} is the OpenType language system tag symbol, or
3476 @code{nil} to use the default language system; @code{gsub} is a list
3477 of OpenType GSUB feature tag symbols, or @code{nil} if none is
3478 required; and @code{gpos} is a list of OpenType GPOS feature tag
3479 symbols, or @code{nil} if none is required. If @code{gsub} or
3480 @code{gpos} is a list, a @code{nil} element in that list means that
3481 the font must not match any of the remaining tag symbols. The
3482 @code{gpos} element may be omitted.
3483 @end table
3484 @end defun
3485
3486 @defun font-put font-spec property value
3487 Set the font property @var{property} in the font-spec @var{font-spec}
3488 to @var{value}.
3489 @end defun
3490
3491 @cindex font entity
3492 A font entity is a reference to a font that need not be open. Its
3493 properties are intermediate between a font object and a font spec:
3494 like a font object, and unlike a font spec, it refers to a single,
3495 specific font. Unlike a font object, creating a font entity does not
3496 load the contents of that font into computer memory. Emacs may open
3497 multiple font objects of different sizes from a single font entity
3498 referring to a scalable font.
3499
3500 @defun find-font font-spec &optional frame
3501 This function returns a font entity that best matches the font spec
3502 @var{font-spec} on frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil},
3503 it defaults to the selected frame.
3504 @end defun
3505
3506 @defun list-fonts font-spec &optional frame num prefer
3507 This function returns a list of all font entities that match the font
3508 spec @var{font-spec}.
3509
3510 The optional argument @var{frame}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
3511 frame on which the fonts are to be displayed. The optional argument
3512 @var{num}, if non-@code{nil}, should be an integer that specifies the
3513 maximum length of the returned list. The optional argument
3514 @var{prefer}, if non-@code{nil}, should be another font spec, which is
3515 used to control the order of the returned list; the returned font
3516 entities are sorted in order of decreasing closeness to that font
3517 spec.
3518 @end defun
3519
3520 If you call @code{set-face-attribute} and pass a font spec, font
3521 entity, or font name string as the value of the @code{:font}
3522 attribute, Emacs opens the best matching font that is available
3523 for display. It then stores the corresponding font object as the
3524 actual value of the @code{:font} attribute for that face.
3525
3526 The following functions can be used to obtain information about a
3527 font. For these functions, the @var{font} argument can be a font
3528 object, a font entity, or a font spec.
3529
3530 @defun font-get font property
3531 This function returns the value of the font property @var{property}
3532 for @var{font}.
3533
3534 If @var{font} is a font spec and the font spec does not specify
3535 @var{property}, the return value is @code{nil}. If @var{font} is a
3536 font object or font entity, the value for the @var{:script} property
3537 may be a list of scripts supported by the font.
3538 @end defun
3539
3540 @defun font-face-attributes font &optional frame
3541 This function returns a list of face attributes corresponding to
3542 @var{font}. The optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on
3543 which the font is to be displayed. If it is @code{nil}, the selected
3544 frame is used. The return value has the form
3545
3546 @smallexample
3547 (:family @var{family} :height @var{height} :weight @var{weight}
3548 :slant @var{slant} :width @var{width})
3549 @end smallexample
3550
3551 where the values of @var{family}, @var{height}, @var{weight},
3552 @var{slant}, and @var{width} are face attribute values. Some of these
3553 key-attribute pairs may be omitted from the list if they are not
3554 specified by @var{font}.
3555 @end defun
3556
3557 @defun font-xlfd-name font &optional fold-wildcards
3558 This function returns the XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor), a string,
3559 matching @var{font}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
3560 information about XLFDs. If the name is too long for an XLFD (which
3561 can contain at most 255 characters), the function returns @code{nil}.
3562
3563 If the optional argument @var{fold-wildcards} is non-@code{nil},
3564 consecutive wildcards in the XLFD are folded into one.
3565 @end defun
3566
3567 The following two functions return important information about a font.
3568
3569 @defun font-info name &optional frame
3570 This function returns information about a font specified by its
3571 @var{name}, a string, as it is used on @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is
3572 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected frame.
3573
3574 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3575 @code{[@var{opened-name} @var{full-name} @var{size} @var{height}
3576 @var{baseline-offset} @var{relative-compose} @var{default-ascent}
3577 @var{max-width} @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width}
3578 @var{average-width} @var{filename} @var{capability}]}. Here's the
3579 description of each components of this vector:
3580
3581 @table @var
3582 @item opened-name
3583 The name used to open the font, a string.
3584
3585 @item full-name
3586 The full name of the font, a string.
3587
3588 @item size
3589 The pixel size of the font.
3590
3591 @item height
3592 The height of the font in pixels.
3593
3594 @item baseline-offset
3595 The offset in pixels from the @acronym{ASCII} baseline, positive
3596 upward.
3597
3598 @item relative-compose
3599 @itemx default-ascent
3600 Numbers controlling how to compose characters.
3601
3602 @item ascent
3603 @itemx descent
3604 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3605 should be equal to the value of @var{height} above.
3606
3607 @item space-width
3608 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3609
3610 @item average-width
3611 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3612 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3613 on display.
3614
3615 @item filename
3616 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3617 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3618
3619 @item capability
3620 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3621 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3622 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3623 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3624 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3625 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3626 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3627 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3628 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3629 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3630 @end table
3631 @end defun
3632
3633 @defun query-font font-object
3634 This function returns information about a @var{font-object}. (This is
3635 in contrast to @code{font-info}, which takes the font name, a string,
3636 as its argument.)
3637
3638 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3639 @code{[@var{name} @var{filename} @var{pixel-size} @var{max-width}
3640 @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width} @var{average-width}
3641 @var{capability}]}. Here's the description of each components of this
3642 vector:
3643
3644 @table @var
3645 @item name
3646 The font name, a string.
3647
3648 @item filename
3649 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3650 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3651
3652 @item pixel-size
3653 The pixel size of the font used to open the font.
3654
3655 @item max-width
3656 The maximum advance width of the font.
3657
3658 @item ascent
3659 @itemx descent
3660 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3661 gives the font height.
3662
3663 @item space-width
3664 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3665
3666 @item average-width
3667 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3668 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3669 on display.
3670
3671 @item capability
3672 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3673 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3674 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3675 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3676 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3677 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3678 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3679 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3680 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3681 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3682 @end table
3683 @end defun
3684
3685 @cindex font information for layout
3686 The following four functions return size information about fonts used
3687 by various faces, allowing various layout considerations in Lisp
3688 programs. These functions take face remapping into consideration,
3689 returning information about the remapped face, if the face in question
3690 was remapped. @xref{Face Remapping}.
3691
3692 @defun default-font-width
3693 This function returns the average width in pixels of the font used by
3694 the current buffer's default face.
3695 @end defun
3696
3697 @defun default-font-height
3698 This function returns the height in pixels of the font used by the
3699 current buffer's default face.
3700 @end defun
3701
3702 @defun window-font-width &optional window face
3703 This function returns the average width in pixels for the font used by
3704 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3705 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3706 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3707 @var{window}.
3708 @end defun
3709
3710 @defun window-font-height &optional window face
3711 This function returns the height in pixels for the font used by
3712 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3713 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3714 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3715 @var{window}.
3716 @end defun
3717
3718 @node Fringes
3719 @section Fringes
3720 @cindex fringes
3721
3722 On graphical displays, Emacs draws @dfn{fringes} next to each
3723 window: thin vertical strips down the sides which can display bitmaps
3724 indicating truncation, continuation, horizontal scrolling, and so on.
3725
3726 @menu
3727 * Fringe Size/Pos:: Specifying where to put the window fringes.
3728 * Fringe Indicators:: Displaying indicator icons in the window fringes.
3729 * Fringe Cursors:: Displaying cursors in the right fringe.
3730 * Fringe Bitmaps:: Specifying bitmaps for fringe indicators.
3731 * Customizing Bitmaps:: Specifying your own bitmaps to use in the fringes.
3732 * Overlay Arrow:: Display of an arrow to indicate position.
3733 @end menu
3734
3735 @node Fringe Size/Pos
3736 @subsection Fringe Size and Position
3737
3738 The following buffer-local variables control the position and width
3739 of fringes in windows showing that buffer.
3740
3741 @defvar fringes-outside-margins
3742 The fringes normally appear between the display margins and the window
3743 text. If the value is non-@code{nil}, they appear outside the display
3744 margins. @xref{Display Margins}.
3745 @end defvar
3746
3747 @defvar left-fringe-width
3748 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the left
3749 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the left fringe
3750 width from the window's frame.
3751 @end defvar
3752
3753 @defvar right-fringe-width
3754 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the right
3755 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the right fringe
3756 width from the window's frame.
3757 @end defvar
3758
3759 Any buffer which does not specify values for these variables uses
3760 the values specified by the @code{left-fringe} and @code{right-fringe}
3761 frame parameters (@pxref{Layout Parameters}).
3762
3763 The above variables actually take effect via the function
3764 @code{set-window-buffer} (@pxref{Buffers and Windows}), which calls
3765 @code{set-window-fringes} as a subroutine. If you change one of these
3766 variables, the fringe display is not updated in existing windows
3767 showing the buffer, unless you call @code{set-window-buffer} again in
3768 each affected window. You can also use @code{set-window-fringes} to
3769 control the fringe display in individual windows.
3770
3771 @defun set-window-fringes window left &optional right outside-margins
3772 This function sets the fringe widths of window @var{window}.
3773 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
3774
3775 The argument @var{left} specifies the width in pixels of the left
3776 fringe, and likewise @var{right} for the right fringe. A value of
3777 @code{nil} for either one stands for the default width. If
3778 @var{outside-margins} is non-@code{nil}, that specifies that fringes
3779 should appear outside of the display margins.
3780 @end defun
3781
3782 @defun window-fringes &optional window
3783 This function returns information about the fringes of a window
3784 @var{window}. If @var{window} is omitted or @code{nil}, the selected
3785 window is used. The value has the form @code{(@var{left-width}
3786 @var{right-width} @var{outside-margins})}.
3787 @end defun
3788
3789
3790 @node Fringe Indicators
3791 @subsection Fringe Indicators
3792 @cindex fringe indicators
3793 @cindex indicators, fringe
3794
3795 @dfn{Fringe indicators} are tiny icons displayed in the window
3796 fringe to indicate truncated or continued lines, buffer boundaries,
3797 etc.
3798
3799 @defopt indicate-empty-lines
3800 @cindex fringes, and empty line indication
3801 @cindex empty lines, indicating
3802 When this is non-@code{nil}, Emacs displays a special glyph in the
3803 fringe of each empty line at the end of the buffer, on graphical
3804 displays. @xref{Fringes}. This variable is automatically
3805 buffer-local in every buffer.
3806 @end defopt
3807
3808 @defopt indicate-buffer-boundaries
3809 @cindex buffer boundaries, indicating
3810 This buffer-local variable controls how the buffer boundaries and
3811 window scrolling are indicated in the window fringes.
3812
3813 Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries---that is, the first and last
3814 line in the buffer---with angle icons when they appear on the screen.
3815 In addition, Emacs can display an up-arrow in the fringe to show
3816 that there is text above the screen, and a down-arrow to show
3817 there is text below the screen.
3818
3819 There are three kinds of basic values:
3820
3821 @table @asis
3822 @item @code{nil}
3823 Don't display any of these fringe icons.
3824 @item @code{left}
3825 Display the angle icons and arrows in the left fringe.
3826 @item @code{right}
3827 Display the angle icons and arrows in the right fringe.
3828 @item any non-alist
3829 Display the angle icons in the left fringe
3830 and don't display the arrows.
3831 @end table
3832
3833 Otherwise the value should be an alist that specifies which fringe
3834 indicators to display and where. Each element of the alist should
3835 have the form @code{(@var{indicator} . @var{position})}. Here,
3836 @var{indicator} is one of @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{up},
3837 @code{down}, and @code{t} (which covers all the icons not yet
3838 specified), while @var{position} is one of @code{left}, @code{right}
3839 and @code{nil}.
3840
3841 For example, @code{((top . left) (t . right))} places the top angle
3842 bitmap in left fringe, and the bottom angle bitmap as well as both
3843 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show the angle bitmaps in the left
3844 fringe, and no arrow bitmaps, use @code{((top . left) (bottom . left))}.
3845 @end defopt
3846
3847 @defvar fringe-indicator-alist
3848 This buffer-local variable specifies the mapping from logical fringe
3849 indicators to the actual bitmaps displayed in the window fringes. The
3850 value is an alist of elements @code{(@var{indicator}
3851 . @var{bitmaps})}, where @var{indicator} specifies a logical indicator
3852 type and @var{bitmaps} specifies the fringe bitmaps to use for that
3853 indicator.
3854
3855 Each @var{indicator} should be one of the following symbols:
3856
3857 @table @asis
3858 @item @code{truncation}, @code{continuation}.
3859 Used for truncation and continuation lines.
3860
3861 @item @code{up}, @code{down}, @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{top-bottom}
3862 Used when @code{indicate-buffer-boundaries} is non-@code{nil}:
3863 @code{up} and @code{down} indicate a buffer boundary lying above or
3864 below the window edge; @code{top} and @code{bottom} indicate the
3865 topmost and bottommost buffer text line; and @code{top-bottom}
3866 indicates where there is just one line of text in the buffer.
3867
3868 @item @code{empty-line}
3869 Used to indicate empty lines when @code{indicate-empty-lines} is
3870 non-@code{nil}.
3871
3872 @item @code{overlay-arrow}
3873 Used for overlay arrows (@pxref{Overlay Arrow}).
3874 @c Is this used anywhere?
3875 @c @item Unknown bitmap indicator:
3876 @c @code{unknown}.
3877 @end table
3878
3879 Each @var{bitmaps} value may be a list of symbols @code{(@var{left}
3880 @var{right} [@var{left1} @var{right1}])}. The @var{left} and
3881 @var{right} symbols specify the bitmaps shown in the left and/or right
3882 fringe, for the specific indicator. @var{left1} and @var{right1} are
3883 specific to the @code{bottom} and @code{top-bottom} indicators, and
3884 are used to indicate that the last text line has no final newline.
3885 Alternatively, @var{bitmaps} may be a single symbol which is used in
3886 both left and right fringes.
3887
3888 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for a list of standard bitmap symbols and how
3889 to define your own. In addition, @code{nil} represents the empty
3890 bitmap (i.e., an indicator that is not shown).
3891
3892 When @code{fringe-indicator-alist} has a buffer-local value, and
3893 there is no bitmap defined for a logical indicator, or the bitmap is
3894 @code{t}, the corresponding value from the default value of
3895 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} is used.
3896 @end defvar
3897
3898 @node Fringe Cursors
3899 @subsection Fringe Cursors
3900 @cindex fringe cursors
3901 @cindex cursor, fringe
3902
3903 When a line is exactly as wide as the window, Emacs displays the
3904 cursor in the right fringe instead of using two lines. Different
3905 bitmaps are used to represent the cursor in the fringe depending on
3906 the current buffer's cursor type.
3907
3908 @defopt overflow-newline-into-fringe
3909 If this is non-@code{nil}, lines exactly as wide as the window (not
3910 counting the final newline character) are not continued. Instead,
3911 when point is at the end of the line, the cursor appears in the right
3912 fringe.
3913 @end defopt
3914
3915 @defvar fringe-cursor-alist
3916 This variable specifies the mapping from logical cursor type to the
3917 actual fringe bitmaps displayed in the right fringe. The value is an
3918 alist where each element has the form @code{(@var{cursor-type}
3919 . @var{bitmap})}, which means to use the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to
3920 display cursors of type @var{cursor-type}.
3921
3922 Each @var{cursor-type} should be one of @code{box}, @code{hollow},
3923 @code{bar}, @code{hbar}, or @code{hollow-small}. The first four have
3924 the same meanings as in the @code{cursor-type} frame parameter
3925 (@pxref{Cursor Parameters}). The @code{hollow-small} type is used
3926 instead of @code{hollow} when the normal @code{hollow-rectangle}
3927 bitmap is too tall to fit on a specific display line.
3928
3929 Each @var{bitmap} should be a symbol specifying the fringe bitmap to
3930 be displayed for that logical cursor type.
3931 @iftex
3932 See the next subsection for details.
3933 @end iftex
3934 @ifnottex
3935 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}.
3936 @end ifnottex
3937
3938 @c FIXME: I can't find the fringes-indicator-alist variable. Maybe
3939 @c it should be fringe-indicator-alist or fringe-cursor-alist? --xfq
3940 When @code{fringe-cursor-alist} has a buffer-local value, and there is
3941 no bitmap defined for a cursor type, the corresponding value from the
3942 default value of @code{fringes-indicator-alist} is used.
3943 @end defvar
3944
3945 @node Fringe Bitmaps
3946 @subsection Fringe Bitmaps
3947 @cindex fringe bitmaps
3948 @cindex bitmaps, fringe
3949
3950 The @dfn{fringe bitmaps} are the actual bitmaps which represent the
3951 logical fringe indicators for truncated or continued lines, buffer
3952 boundaries, overlay arrows, etc. Each bitmap is represented by a
3953 symbol.
3954 @iftex
3955 These symbols are referred to by the variables
3956 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist},
3957 described in the previous subsections.
3958 @end iftex
3959 @ifnottex
3960 These symbols are referred to by the variable
3961 @code{fringe-indicator-alist}, which maps fringe indicators to bitmaps
3962 (@pxref{Fringe Indicators}), and the variable
3963 @code{fringe-cursor-alist}, which maps fringe cursors to bitmaps
3964 (@pxref{Fringe Cursors}).
3965 @end ifnottex
3966
3967 Lisp programs can also directly display a bitmap in the left or
3968 right fringe, by using a @code{display} property for one of the
3969 characters appearing in the line (@pxref{Other Display Specs}). Such
3970 a display specification has the form
3971
3972 @example
3973 (@var{fringe} @var{bitmap} [@var{face}])
3974 @end example
3975
3976 @noindent
3977 @var{fringe} is either the symbol @code{left-fringe} or
3978 @code{right-fringe}. @var{bitmap} is a symbol identifying the bitmap
3979 to display. The optional @var{face} names a face whose foreground
3980 color is used to display the bitmap; this face is automatically merged
3981 with the @code{fringe} face.
3982
3983 Here is a list of the standard fringe bitmaps defined in Emacs, and
3984 how they are currently used in Emacs (via
3985 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist}):
3986
3987 @table @asis
3988 @item @code{left-arrow}, @code{right-arrow}
3989 Used to indicate truncated lines.
3990
3991 @item @code{left-curly-arrow}, @code{right-curly-arrow}
3992 Used to indicate continued lines.
3993
3994 @item @code{right-triangle}, @code{left-triangle}
3995 The former is used by overlay arrows. The latter is unused.
3996
3997 @item @code{up-arrow}, @code{down-arrow}, @code{top-left-angle} @code{top-right-angle}
3998 @itemx @code{bottom-left-angle}, @code{bottom-right-angle}
3999 @itemx @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
4000 @itemx @code{left-bracket}, @code{right-bracket}, @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
4001 Used to indicate buffer boundaries.
4002
4003 @item @code{filled-rectangle}, @code{hollow-rectangle}
4004 @itemx @code{filled-square}, @code{hollow-square}
4005 @itemx @code{vertical-bar}, @code{horizontal-bar}
4006 Used for different types of fringe cursors.
4007
4008 @item @code{empty-line}, @code{exclamation-mark}, @code{question-mark}, @code{exclamation-mark}
4009 Not used by core Emacs features.
4010 @end table
4011
4012 @noindent
4013 The next subsection describes how to define your own fringe bitmaps.
4014
4015 @defun fringe-bitmaps-at-pos &optional pos window
4016 This function returns the fringe bitmaps of the display line
4017 containing position @var{pos} in window @var{window}. The return
4018 value has the form @code{(@var{left} @var{right} @var{ov})}, where @var{left}
4019 is the symbol for the fringe bitmap in the left fringe (or @code{nil}
4020 if no bitmap), @var{right} is similar for the right fringe, and @var{ov}
4021 is non-@code{nil} if there is an overlay arrow in the left fringe.
4022
4023 The value is @code{nil} if @var{pos} is not visible in @var{window}.
4024 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, that stands for the selected window.
4025 If @var{pos} is @code{nil}, that stands for the value of point in
4026 @var{window}.
4027 @end defun
4028
4029 @node Customizing Bitmaps
4030 @subsection Customizing Fringe Bitmaps
4031 @cindex fringe bitmaps, customizing
4032
4033 @defun define-fringe-bitmap bitmap bits &optional height width align
4034 This function defines the symbol @var{bitmap} as a new fringe bitmap,
4035 or replaces an existing bitmap with that name.
4036
4037 The argument @var{bits} specifies the image to use. It should be
4038 either a string or a vector of integers, where each element (an
4039 integer) corresponds to one row of the bitmap. Each bit of an integer
4040 corresponds to one pixel of the bitmap, where the low bit corresponds
4041 to the rightmost pixel of the bitmap.
4042
4043 The height is normally the length of @var{bits}. However, you
4044 can specify a different height with non-@code{nil} @var{height}. The width
4045 is normally 8, but you can specify a different width with non-@code{nil}
4046 @var{width}. The width must be an integer between 1 and 16.
4047
4048 The argument @var{align} specifies the positioning of the bitmap
4049 relative to the range of rows where it is used; the default is to
4050 center the bitmap. The allowed values are @code{top}, @code{center},
4051 or @code{bottom}.
4052
4053 The @var{align} argument may also be a list @code{(@var{align}
4054 @var{periodic})} where @var{align} is interpreted as described above.
4055 If @var{periodic} is non-@code{nil}, it specifies that the rows in
4056 @code{bits} should be repeated enough times to reach the specified
4057 height.
4058 @end defun
4059
4060 @defun destroy-fringe-bitmap bitmap
4061 This function destroy the fringe bitmap identified by @var{bitmap}.
4062 If @var{bitmap} identifies a standard fringe bitmap, it actually
4063 restores the standard definition of that bitmap, instead of
4064 eliminating it entirely.
4065 @end defun
4066
4067 @defun set-fringe-bitmap-face bitmap &optional face
4068 This sets the face for the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to @var{face}.
4069 If @var{face} is @code{nil}, it selects the @code{fringe} face. The
4070 bitmap's face controls the color to draw it in.
4071
4072 @var{face} is merged with the @code{fringe} face, so normally
4073 @var{face} should specify only the foreground color.
4074 @end defun
4075
4076 @node Overlay Arrow
4077 @subsection The Overlay Arrow
4078 @c @cindex overlay arrow Duplicates variable names
4079
4080 The @dfn{overlay arrow} is useful for directing the user's attention
4081 to a particular line in a buffer. For example, in the modes used for
4082 interface to debuggers, the overlay arrow indicates the line of code
4083 about to be executed. This feature has nothing to do with
4084 @dfn{overlays} (@pxref{Overlays}).
4085
4086 @defvar overlay-arrow-string
4087 This variable holds the string to display to call attention to a
4088 particular line, or @code{nil} if the arrow feature is not in use.
4089 On a graphical display the contents of the string are ignored; instead a
4090 glyph is displayed in the fringe area to the left of the display area.
4091 @end defvar
4092
4093 @defvar overlay-arrow-position
4094 This variable holds a marker that indicates where to display the overlay
4095 arrow. It should point at the beginning of a line. On a non-graphical
4096 display the arrow text
4097 appears at the beginning of that line, overlaying any text that would
4098 otherwise appear. Since the arrow is usually short, and the line
4099 usually begins with indentation, normally nothing significant is
4100 overwritten.
4101
4102 The overlay-arrow string is displayed in any given buffer if the value
4103 of @code{overlay-arrow-position} in that buffer points into that
4104 buffer. Thus, it is possible to display multiple overlay arrow strings
4105 by creating buffer-local bindings of @code{overlay-arrow-position}.
4106 However, it is usually cleaner to use
4107 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list} to achieve this result.
4108 @c !!! overlay-arrow-position: but the overlay string may remain in the display
4109 @c of some other buffer until an update is required. This should be fixed
4110 @c now. Is it?
4111 @end defvar
4112
4113 You can do a similar job by creating an overlay with a
4114 @code{before-string} property. @xref{Overlay Properties}.
4115
4116 You can define multiple overlay arrows via the variable
4117 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list}.
4118
4119 @defvar overlay-arrow-variable-list
4120 This variable's value is a list of variables, each of which specifies
4121 the position of an overlay arrow. The variable
4122 @code{overlay-arrow-position} has its normal meaning because it is on
4123 this list.
4124 @end defvar
4125
4126 Each variable on this list can have properties
4127 @code{overlay-arrow-string} and @code{overlay-arrow-bitmap} that
4128 specify an overlay arrow string (for text terminals) or fringe bitmap
4129 (for graphical terminals) to display at the corresponding overlay
4130 arrow position. If either property is not set, the default
4131 @code{overlay-arrow-string} or @code{overlay-arrow} fringe indicator
4132 is used.
4133
4134
4135 @node Scroll Bars
4136 @section Scroll Bars
4137 @cindex scroll bars
4138
4139 Normally the frame parameter @code{vertical-scroll-bars} controls
4140 whether the windows in the frame have vertical scroll bars, and whether
4141 they are on the left or right. The frame parameter
4142 @code{scroll-bar-width} specifies how wide they are (@code{nil} meaning
4143 the default).
4144
4145 The frame parameter @code{horizontal-scroll-bars} controls whether
4146 the windows in the frame have horizontal scroll bars. The frame
4147 parameter @code{scroll-bar-height} specifies how high they are
4148 (@code{nil} meaning the default). @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4149
4150 @vindex horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p
4151 Horizontal scroll bars are not available on all platforms. The
4152 function @code{horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p} which takes no
4153 argument returns non-@code{nil} if they are available on your system.
4154
4155 The following three functions take as argument a live frame which
4156 defaults to the selected one.
4157
4158 @defun frame-current-scroll-bars &optional frame
4159 This function reports the scroll bar types for frame @var{frame}. The
4160 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4161 @var{horizontal-type})}, where @var{vertical-type} is either
4162 @code{left}, @code{right}, or @code{nil} (which means no vertical scroll
4163 bar.) @var{horizontal-type} is either @code{bottom} or @code{nil}
4164 (which means no horizontal scroll bar).
4165 @end defun
4166
4167 @defun frame-scroll-bar-width &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4168 This function returns the width of vertical scroll bars of @var{frame}
4169 in pixels.
4170 @end defun
4171
4172 @defun frame-scroll-bar-height &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4173 This function returns the height of horizontal scroll bars of
4174 @var{frame} in pixels.
4175 @end defun
4176
4177 You can override the frame specific settings for individual windows by
4178 using the following function:
4179
4180 @defun set-window-scroll-bars window &optional width vertical-type height horizontal-type
4181 This function sets the width and/or height and the types of scroll bars
4182 for window @var{window}.
4183
4184 @var{width} specifies the width of the vertical scroll bar in pixels
4185 (@code{nil} means use the width specified for the frame).
4186 @var{vertical-type} specifies whether to have a vertical scroll bar and,
4187 if so, where. The possible values are @code{left}, @code{right},
4188 @code{t}, which means to use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no
4189 vertical scroll bar.
4190
4191 @var{height} specifies the height of the horizontal scroll bar in pixels
4192 (@code{nil} means use the height specified for the frame).
4193 @var{horizontal-type} specifies whether to have a horizontal scroll bar.
4194 The possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4195 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no horizontal scroll bar.
4196
4197 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
4198 @end defun
4199
4200 The following four functions take as argument a live window which
4201 defaults to the selected one.
4202
4203 @defun window-scroll-bars &optional window
4204 This function returns a list of the form @code{(@var{width}
4205 @var{columns} @var{vertical-type} @var{height} @var{lines}
4206 @var{horizontal-type})}.
4207
4208 The value @var{width} is the value that was specified for the width of
4209 the vertical scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{columns} is the
4210 (possibly rounded) number of columns that the vertical scroll bar
4211 actually occupies.
4212
4213 The value @var{height} is the value that was specified for the height of
4214 the horizontal scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{lines} is the
4215 (possibly rounded) number of lines that the horizontally scroll bar
4216 actually occupies.
4217 @end defun
4218
4219 @defun window-current-scroll-bars &optional window
4220 This function reports the scroll bar type for window @var{window}. The
4221 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4222 @var{horizontal-type})}. Unlike @code{window-scroll-bars}, this reports
4223 the scroll bar type actually used, once frame defaults and
4224 @code{scroll-bar-mode} are taken into account.
4225 @end defun
4226
4227 @defun window-scroll-bar-width &optional window
4228 This function returns the width in pixels of @var{window}'s vertical
4229 scrollbar.
4230 @end defun
4231
4232 @defun window-scroll-bar-height &optional window
4233 This function returns the height in pixels of @var{window}'s horizontal
4234 scrollbar.
4235 @end defun
4236
4237 If you don't specify these values for a window with
4238 @code{set-window-scroll-bars}, the buffer-local variables
4239 @code{vertical-scroll-bar}, @code{horizontal-scroll-bar},
4240 @code{scroll-bar-width} and @code{scroll-bar-height} in the buffer being
4241 displayed control the window's scroll bars. The function
4242 @code{set-window-buffer} examines these variables. If you change them
4243 in a buffer that is already visible in a window, you can make the window
4244 take note of the new values by calling @code{set-window-buffer}
4245 specifying the same buffer that is already displayed.
4246
4247 You can control the appearance of scroll bars for a particular buffer by
4248 setting the following variables which automatically become buffer-local
4249 when set.
4250
4251 @defvar vertical-scroll-bar
4252 This variable specifies the location of the vertical scroll bar. The
4253 possible values are @code{left}, @code{right}, @code{t}, which means to
4254 use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4255 @end defvar
4256
4257 @defvar horizontal-scroll-bar
4258 This variable specifies the location of the horizontal scroll bar. The
4259 possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4260 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4261 @end defvar
4262
4263 @defvar scroll-bar-width
4264 This variable specifies the width of the buffer's vertical scroll bars,
4265 measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4266 specified by the frame.
4267 @end defvar
4268
4269 @defvar scroll-bar-height
4270 This variable specifies the height of the buffer's horizontal scroll
4271 bar, measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4272 specified by the frame.
4273 @end defvar
4274
4275 Finally you can toggle the display of scroll bars on all frames by
4276 customizing the variables @code{scroll-bar-mode} and
4277 @code{horizontal-scroll-bar-mode}.
4278
4279 @defopt scroll-bar-mode
4280 This variable controls whether and where to put vertical scroll bars in
4281 all frames. The possible values are @code{nil} for no scroll bars,
4282 @code{left} to put scroll bars on the left and @code{right} to put
4283 scroll bars on the right.
4284 @end defopt
4285
4286 @defopt horizontal-scroll-bar-mode
4287 This variable controls whether to display horizontal scroll bars on all
4288 frames.
4289 @end defopt
4290
4291
4292 @node Window Dividers
4293 @section Window Dividers
4294 @cindex window dividers
4295 @cindex right dividers
4296 @cindex bottom dividers
4297
4298 Window dividers are bars drawn between a frame's windows. A right
4299 divider is drawn between a window and any adjacent windows on the right.
4300 Its width (thickness) is specified by the frame parameter
4301 @code{right-divider-width}. A bottom divider is drawn between a
4302 window and adjacent windows on the bottom or the echo area. Its width
4303 is specified by the frame parameter @code{bottom-divider-width}. In
4304 either case, specifying a width of zero means to not draw such dividers.
4305 @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4306
4307 Technically, a right divider belongs to the window on its left,
4308 which means that its width contributes to the total width of that
4309 window. A bottom divider belongs to the window above it, which
4310 means that its width contributes to the total height of that window.
4311 @xref{Window Sizes}. When a window has both, a right and a bottom
4312 divider, the bottom divider prevails. This means that a bottom
4313 divider is drawn over the full total width of its window while the right
4314 divider ends above the bottom divider.
4315
4316 Dividers can be dragged with the mouse and are therefore useful for
4317 adjusting the sizes of adjacent windows with the mouse. They also serve
4318 to visually set apart adjacent windows when no scroll bars or mode lines
4319 are present. The following three faces allow the customization of the
4320 appearance of dividers:
4321
4322 @table @code
4323 @item window-divider
4324 When a divider is less than three pixels wide, it is drawn solidly with
4325 the foreground of this face. For larger dividers this face is used for
4326 the inner part only, excluding the first and last pixel.
4327
4328 @item window-divider-first-pixel
4329 This is the face used for drawing the first pixel of a divider that is
4330 at least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to
4331 the same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4332
4333 @item window-divider-last-pixel
4334 This is the face used for drawing the last pixel of a divider that is at
4335 least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to the
4336 same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4337 @end table
4338
4339 You can get the sizes of the dividers of a specific window with the
4340 following two functions.
4341
4342 @defun window-right-divider-width &optional window
4343 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s right divider.
4344 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4345 The return value is always zero for a rightmost window.
4346 @end defun
4347
4348 @defun window-bottom-divider-width &optional window
4349 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s bottom divider.
4350 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4351 The return value is zero for the minibuffer window or a bottommost
4352 window on a minibuffer-less frame.
4353 @end defun
4354
4355
4356 @node Display Property
4357 @section The @code{display} Property
4358 @cindex display specification
4359 @kindex display @r{(text property)}
4360
4361 The @code{display} text property (or overlay property) is used to
4362 insert images into text, and to control other aspects of how text
4363 displays. The value of the @code{display} property should be a
4364 display specification, or a list or vector containing several display
4365 specifications. Display specifications in the same @code{display}
4366 property value generally apply in parallel to the text they cover.
4367
4368 If several sources (overlays and/or a text property) specify values
4369 for the @code{display} property, only one of the values takes effect,
4370 following the rules of @code{get-char-property}. @xref{Examining
4371 Properties}.
4372
4373 The rest of this section describes several kinds of
4374 display specifications and what they mean.
4375
4376 @menu
4377 * Replacing Specs:: Display specs that replace the text.
4378 * Specified Space:: Displaying one space with a specified width.
4379 * Pixel Specification:: Specifying space width or height in pixels.
4380 * Other Display Specs:: Displaying an image; adjusting the height,
4381 spacing, and other properties of text.
4382 * Display Margins:: Displaying text or images to the side of the main text.
4383 @end menu
4384
4385 @node Replacing Specs
4386 @subsection Display Specs That Replace The Text
4387 @cindex replacing display specs
4388
4389 Some kinds of display specifications specify something to display
4390 instead of the text that has the property. These are called
4391 @dfn{replacing} display specifications. Emacs does not allow the user
4392 to interactively move point into the middle of buffer text that is
4393 replaced in this way.
4394
4395 If a list of display specifications includes more than one replacing
4396 display specification, the first overrides the rest. Replacing
4397 display specifications make most other display specifications
4398 irrelevant, since those don't apply to the replacement.
4399
4400 For replacing display specifications, @dfn{the text that has the
4401 property} means all the consecutive characters that have the same
4402 Lisp object as their @code{display} property; these characters are
4403 replaced as a single unit. If two characters have different Lisp
4404 objects as their @code{display} properties (i.e., objects which are
4405 not @code{eq}), they are handled separately.
4406
4407 Here is an example which illustrates this point. A string serves as
4408 a replacing display specification, which replaces the text that has
4409 the property with the specified string (@pxref{Other Display Specs}).
4410 Consider the following function:
4411
4412 @smallexample
4413 (defun foo ()
4414 (dotimes (i 5)
4415 (let ((string (concat "A"))
4416 (start (+ i i (point-min))))
4417 (put-text-property start (1+ start) 'display string)
4418 (put-text-property start (+ 2 start) 'display string))))
4419 @end smallexample
4420
4421 @noindent
4422 This function gives each of the first ten characters in the buffer a
4423 @code{display} property which is a string @code{"A"}, but they don't
4424 all get the same string object. The first two characters get the same
4425 string object, so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; the fact that
4426 the display property was assigned in two separate calls to
4427 @code{put-text-property} is irrelevant. Similarly, the next two
4428 characters get a second string (@code{concat} creates a new string
4429 object), so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; and so on. Thus, the
4430 ten characters appear as five A's.
4431
4432 @node Specified Space
4433 @subsection Specified Spaces
4434 @cindex spaces, specified height or width
4435 @cindex variable-width spaces
4436
4437 To display a space of specified width and/or height, use a display
4438 specification of the form @code{(space . @var{props})}, where
4439 @var{props} is a property list (a list of alternating properties and
4440 values). You can put this property on one or more consecutive
4441 characters; a space of the specified height and width is displayed in
4442 place of @emph{all} of those characters. These are the properties you
4443 can use in @var{props} to specify the weight of the space:
4444
4445 @table @code
4446 @item :width @var{width}
4447 If @var{width} is a number, it specifies
4448 that the space width should be @var{width} times the normal character
4449 width. @var{width} can also be a @dfn{pixel width} specification
4450 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4451
4452 @item :relative-width @var{factor}
4453 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4454 first character in the group of consecutive characters that have the
4455 same @code{display} property. The space width is the pixel width of
4456 that character, multiplied by @var{factor}. (On text-mode terminals,
4457 the ``pixel width'' of a character is usually 1, but it could be more
4458 for TABs and double-width CJK characters.)
4459
4460 @item :align-to @var{hpos}
4461 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach @var{hpos}.
4462 If @var{hpos} is a number, it is measured in units of the normal
4463 character width. @var{hpos} can also be a @dfn{pixel width}
4464 specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4465 @end table
4466
4467 You should use one and only one of the above properties. You can
4468 also specify the height of the space, with these properties:
4469
4470 @table @code
4471 @item :height @var{height}
4472 Specifies the height of the space.
4473 If @var{height} is a number, it specifies
4474 that the space height should be @var{height} times the normal character
4475 height. The @var{height} may also be a @dfn{pixel height} specification
4476 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4477
4478 @item :relative-height @var{factor}
4479 Specifies the height of the space, multiplying the ordinary height
4480 of the text having this display specification by @var{factor}.
4481
4482 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4483 If the value of @var{ascent} is a non-negative number no greater than
4484 100, it specifies that @var{ascent} percent of the height of the space
4485 should be considered as the ascent of the space---that is, the part
4486 above the baseline. The ascent may also be specified in pixel units
4487 with a @dfn{pixel ascent} specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4488
4489 @end table
4490
4491 Don't use both @code{:height} and @code{:relative-height} together.
4492
4493 The @code{:width} and @code{:align-to} properties are supported on
4494 non-graphic terminals, but the other space properties in this section
4495 are not.
4496
4497 Note that space properties are treated as paragraph separators for
4498 the purposes of reordering bidirectional text for display.
4499 @xref{Bidirectional Display}, for the details.
4500
4501 @node Pixel Specification
4502 @subsection Pixel Specification for Spaces
4503 @cindex spaces, pixel specification
4504
4505 The value of the @code{:width}, @code{:align-to}, @code{:height},
4506 and @code{:ascent} properties can be a special kind of expression that
4507 is evaluated during redisplay. The result of the evaluation is used
4508 as an absolute number of pixels.
4509
4510 The following expressions are supported:
4511
4512 @smallexample
4513 @group
4514 @var{expr} ::= @var{num} | (@var{num}) | @var{unit} | @var{elem} | @var{pos} | @var{image} | @var{form}
4515 @var{num} ::= @var{integer} | @var{float} | @var{symbol}
4516 @var{unit} ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4517 @end group
4518 @group
4519 @var{elem} ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4520 | scroll-bar | text
4521 @var{pos} ::= left | center | right
4522 @var{form} ::= (@var{num} . @var{expr}) | (@var{op} @var{expr} ...)
4523 @var{op} ::= + | -
4524 @end group
4525 @end smallexample
4526
4527 The form @var{num} specifies a fraction of the default frame font
4528 height or width. The form @code{(@var{num})} specifies an absolute
4529 number of pixels. If @var{num} is a symbol, @var{symbol}, its
4530 buffer-local variable binding is used.
4531
4532 The @code{in}, @code{mm}, and @code{cm} units specify the number of
4533 pixels per inch, millimeter, and centimeter, respectively. The
4534 @code{width} and @code{height} units correspond to the default width
4535 and height of the current face. An image specification @code{image}
4536 corresponds to the width or height of the image.
4537
4538 The elements @code{left-fringe}, @code{right-fringe},
4539 @code{left-margin}, @code{right-margin}, @code{scroll-bar}, and
4540 @code{text} specify to the width of the corresponding area of the
4541 window.
4542
4543 The @code{left}, @code{center}, and @code{right} positions can be
4544 used with @code{:align-to} to specify a position relative to the left
4545 edge, center, or right edge of the text area.
4546
4547 Any of the above window elements (except @code{text}) can also be
4548 used with @code{:align-to} to specify that the position is relative to
4549 the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for a relative
4550 position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of these
4551 symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as the
4552 width of the specified area. For example, to align to the center of
4553 the left-margin, use
4554
4555 @example
4556 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4557 @end example
4558
4559 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4560 to the left edge of the text area. For example, @samp{:align-to 0} in a
4561 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4562
4563 A value of the form @code{(@var{num} . @var{expr})} stands for the
4564 product of the values of @var{num} and @var{expr}. For example,
4565 @code{(2 . in)} specifies a width of 2 inches, while @code{(0.5 .
4566 @var{image})} specifies half the width (or height) of the specified
4567 image.
4568
4569 The form @code{(+ @var{expr} ...)} adds up the value of the
4570 expressions. The form @code{(- @var{expr} ...)} negates or subtracts
4571 the value of the expressions.
4572
4573 @node Other Display Specs
4574 @subsection Other Display Specifications
4575
4576 Here are the other sorts of display specifications that you can use
4577 in the @code{display} text property.
4578
4579 @table @code
4580 @item @var{string}
4581 Display @var{string} instead of the text that has this property.
4582
4583 Recursive display specifications are not supported---@var{string}'s
4584 @code{display} properties, if any, are not used.
4585
4586 @item (image . @var{image-props})
4587 This kind of display specification is an image descriptor (@pxref{Images}).
4588 When used as a display specification, it means to display the image
4589 instead of the text that has the display specification.
4590
4591 @item (slice @var{x} @var{y} @var{width} @var{height})
4592 This specification together with @code{image} specifies a @dfn{slice}
4593 (a partial area) of the image to display. The elements @var{y} and
4594 @var{x} specify the top left corner of the slice, within the image;
4595 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the width and height of the
4596 slice. Integers are numbers of pixels. A floating-point number
4597 in the range 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height
4598 of the entire image.
4599
4600 @item ((margin nil) @var{string})
4601 A display specification of this form means to display @var{string}
4602 instead of the text that has the display specification, at the same
4603 position as that text. It is equivalent to using just @var{string},
4604 but it is done as a special case of marginal display (@pxref{Display
4605 Margins}).
4606
4607 @item (left-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4608 @itemx (right-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4609 This display specification on any character of a line of text causes
4610 the specified @var{bitmap} be displayed in the left or right fringes
4611 for that line, instead of the characters that have the display
4612 specification. The optional @var{face} specifies the colors to be
4613 used for the bitmap. @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for the details.
4614
4615 @item (space-width @var{factor})
4616 This display specification affects all the space characters within the
4617 text that has the specification. It displays all of these spaces
4618 @var{factor} times as wide as normal. The element @var{factor} should
4619 be an integer or float. Characters other than spaces are not affected
4620 at all; in particular, this has no effect on tab characters.
4621
4622 @item (height @var{height})
4623 This display specification makes the text taller or shorter.
4624 Here are the possibilities for @var{height}:
4625
4626 @table @asis
4627 @item @code{(+ @var{n})}
4628 @c FIXME: Add an index for "step"? --xfq
4629 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps larger. A @dfn{step} is
4630 defined by the set of available fonts---specifically, those that match
4631 what was otherwise specified for this text, in all attributes except
4632 height. Each size for which a suitable font is available counts as
4633 another step. @var{n} should be an integer.
4634
4635 @item @code{(- @var{n})}
4636 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps smaller.
4637
4638 @item a number, @var{factor}
4639 A number, @var{factor}, means to use a font that is @var{factor} times
4640 as tall as the default font.
4641
4642 @item a symbol, @var{function}
4643 A symbol is a function to compute the height. It is called with the
4644 current height as argument, and should return the new height to use.
4645
4646 @item anything else, @var{form}
4647 If the @var{height} value doesn't fit the previous possibilities, it is
4648 a form. Emacs evaluates it to get the new height, with the symbol
4649 @code{height} bound to the current specified font height.
4650 @end table
4651
4652 @item (raise @var{factor})
4653 This kind of display specification raises or lowers the text
4654 it applies to, relative to the baseline of the line.
4655
4656 @var{factor} must be a number, which is interpreted as a multiple of the
4657 height of the affected text. If it is positive, that means to display
4658 the characters raised. If it is negative, that means to display them
4659 lower down.
4660
4661 If the text also has a @code{height} display specification, that does
4662 not affect the amount of raising or lowering, which is based on the
4663 faces used for the text.
4664 @end table
4665
4666 @c We put all the '@code{(when ...)}' on one line to encourage
4667 @c makeinfo's end-of-sentence heuristics to DTRT. Previously, the dot
4668 @c was at eol; the info file ended up w/ two spaces rendered after it.
4669 You can make any display specification conditional. To do that,
4670 package it in another list of the form
4671 @code{(when @var{condition} . @var{spec})}.
4672 Then the specification @var{spec} applies only when
4673 @var{condition} evaluates to a non-@code{nil} value. During the
4674 evaluation, @code{object} is bound to the string or buffer having the
4675 conditional @code{display} property. @code{position} and
4676 @code{buffer-position} are bound to the position within @code{object}
4677 and the buffer position where the @code{display} property was found,
4678 respectively. Both positions can be different when @code{object} is a
4679 string.
4680
4681 @node Display Margins
4682 @subsection Displaying in the Margins
4683 @cindex display margins
4684 @cindex margins, display
4685
4686 A buffer can have blank areas called @dfn{display margins} on the
4687 left and on the right. Ordinary text never appears in these areas,
4688 but you can put things into the display margins using the
4689 @code{display} property. There is currently no way to make text or
4690 images in the margin mouse-sensitive.
4691
4692 The way to display something in the margins is to specify it in a
4693 margin display specification in the @code{display} property of some
4694 text. This is a replacing display specification, meaning that the
4695 text you put it on does not get displayed; the margin display appears,
4696 but that text does not.
4697
4698 A margin display specification looks like @code{((margin
4699 right-margin) @var{spec})} or @code{((margin left-margin) @var{spec})}.
4700 Here, @var{spec} is another display specification that says what to
4701 display in the margin. Typically it is a string of text to display,
4702 or an image descriptor.
4703
4704 To display something in the margin @emph{in association with}
4705 certain buffer text, without altering or preventing the display of
4706 that text, put a @code{before-string} property on the text and put the
4707 margin display specification on the contents of the before-string.
4708
4709 Before the display margins can display anything, you must give
4710 them a nonzero width. The usual way to do that is to set these
4711 variables:
4712
4713 @defvar left-margin-width
4714 This variable specifies the width of the left margin, in character
4715 cell (a.k.a.@: ``column'') units. It is buffer-local in all buffers.
4716 A value of @code{nil} means no left marginal area.
4717 @end defvar
4718
4719 @defvar right-margin-width
4720 This variable specifies the width of the right margin, in character
4721 cell units. It is buffer-local in all buffers. A value of @code{nil}
4722 means no right marginal area.
4723 @end defvar
4724
4725 Setting these variables does not immediately affect the window. These
4726 variables are checked when a new buffer is displayed in the window.
4727 Thus, you can make changes take effect by calling
4728 @code{set-window-buffer}.
4729
4730 You can also set the margin widths immediately.
4731
4732 @defun set-window-margins window left &optional right
4733 This function specifies the margin widths for window @var{window}, in
4734 character cell units. The argument @var{left} controls the left
4735 margin, and @var{right} controls the right margin (default @code{0}).
4736 @end defun
4737
4738 @defun window-margins &optional window
4739 This function returns the width of the left and right margins of
4740 @var{window} as a cons cell of the form @w{@code{(@var{left}
4741 . @var{right})}}. If one of the two marginal areas does not exist,
4742 its width is returned as @code{nil}; if neither of the two margins exist,
4743 the function returns @code{(nil)}. If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the
4744 selected window is used.
4745 @end defun
4746
4747 @node Images
4748 @section Images
4749 @cindex images in buffers
4750
4751 To display an image in an Emacs buffer, you must first create an image
4752 descriptor, then use it as a display specifier in the @code{display}
4753 property of text that is displayed (@pxref{Display Property}).
4754
4755 Emacs is usually able to display images when it is run on a
4756 graphical terminal. Images cannot be displayed in a text terminal, on
4757 certain graphical terminals that lack the support for this, or if
4758 Emacs is compiled without image support. You can use the function
4759 @code{display-images-p} to determine if images can in principle be
4760 displayed (@pxref{Display Feature Testing}).
4761
4762 @menu
4763 * Image Formats:: Supported image formats.
4764 * Image Descriptors:: How to specify an image for use in @code{:display}.
4765 * XBM Images:: Special features for XBM format.
4766 * XPM Images:: Special features for XPM format.
4767 * PostScript Images:: Special features for PostScript format.
4768 * ImageMagick Images:: Special features available through ImageMagick.
4769 * SVG Images:: Creating and manipulating SVG images.
4770 * Other Image Types:: Various other formats are supported.
4771 * Defining Images:: Convenient ways to define an image for later use.
4772 * Showing Images:: Convenient ways to display an image once it is defined.
4773 * Multi-Frame Images:: Some images contain more than one frame.
4774 * Image Cache:: Internal mechanisms of image display.
4775 @end menu
4776
4777 @node Image Formats
4778 @subsection Image Formats
4779 @cindex image formats
4780 @cindex image types
4781
4782 Emacs can display a number of different image formats. Some of
4783 these image formats are supported only if particular support libraries
4784 are installed. On some platforms, Emacs can load support libraries on
4785 demand; if so, the variable @code{dynamic-library-alist} can be used
4786 to modify the set of known names for these dynamic libraries.
4787 @xref{Dynamic Libraries}.
4788
4789 Supported image formats (and the required support libraries) include
4790 PBM and XBM (which do not depend on support libraries and are always
4791 available), XPM (@code{libXpm}), GIF (@code{libgif} or
4792 @code{libungif}), PostScript (@code{gs}), JPEG (@code{libjpeg}), TIFF
4793 (@code{libtiff}), PNG (@code{libpng}), and SVG (@code{librsvg}).
4794
4795 Each of these image formats is associated with an @dfn{image type
4796 symbol}. The symbols for the above formats are, respectively,
4797 @code{pbm}, @code{xbm}, @code{xpm}, @code{gif}, @code{postscript},
4798 @code{jpeg}, @code{tiff}, @code{png}, and @code{svg}.
4799
4800 Furthermore, if you build Emacs with ImageMagick
4801 (@code{libMagickWand}) support, Emacs can display any image format
4802 that ImageMagick can. @xref{ImageMagick Images}. All images
4803 displayed via ImageMagick have type symbol @code{imagemagick}.
4804
4805 @defvar image-types
4806 This variable contains a list of type symbols for image formats which
4807 are potentially supported in the current configuration.
4808
4809 ``Potentially'' means that Emacs knows about the image types, not
4810 necessarily that they can be used (for example, they could depend on
4811 unavailable dynamic libraries). To know which image types are really
4812 available, use @code{image-type-available-p}.
4813 @end defvar
4814
4815 @defun image-type-available-p type
4816 This function returns non-@code{nil} if images of type @var{type} can
4817 be loaded and displayed. @var{type} must be an image type symbol.
4818
4819 For image types whose support libraries are statically linked, this
4820 function always returns @code{t}. For image types whose support
4821 libraries are dynamically loaded, it returns @code{t} if the library
4822 could be loaded and @code{nil} otherwise.
4823 @end defun
4824
4825 @node Image Descriptors
4826 @subsection Image Descriptors
4827 @cindex image descriptor
4828
4829 An @dfn{image descriptor} is a list which specifies the underlying
4830 data for an image, and how to display it. It is typically used as the
4831 value of a @code{display} overlay or text property (@pxref{Other
4832 Display Specs}); but @xref{Showing Images}, for convenient helper
4833 functions to insert images into buffers.
4834
4835 Each image descriptor has the form @code{(image . @var{props})},
4836 where @var{props} is a property list of alternating keyword symbols
4837 and values, including at least the pair @code{:type @var{type}} that
4838 specifies the image type.
4839
4840 The following is a list of properties that are meaningful for all
4841 image types (there are also properties which are meaningful only for
4842 certain image types, as documented in the following subsections):
4843
4844 @table @code
4845 @item :type @var{type}
4846 The image type.
4847 @ifnottex
4848 @xref{Image Formats}.
4849 @end ifnottex
4850 Every image descriptor must include this property.
4851
4852 @item :file @var{file}
4853 This says to load the image from file @var{file}. If @var{file} is
4854 not an absolute file name, it is expanded in @code{data-directory}.
4855
4856 @item :data @var{data}
4857 This specifies the raw image data. Each image descriptor must have
4858 either @code{:data} or @code{:file}, but not both.
4859
4860 For most image types, the value of a @code{:data} property should be a
4861 string containing the image data. Some image types do not support
4862 @code{:data}; for some others, @code{:data} alone is not enough, so
4863 you need to use other image properties along with @code{:data}. See
4864 the following subsections for details.
4865
4866 @item :margin @var{margin}
4867 This specifies how many pixels to add as an extra margin around the
4868 image. The value, @var{margin}, must be a non-negative number, or a
4869 pair @code{(@var{x} . @var{y})} of such numbers. If it is a pair,
4870 @var{x} specifies how many pixels to add horizontally, and @var{y}
4871 specifies how many pixels to add vertically. If @code{:margin} is not
4872 specified, the default is zero.
4873
4874 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4875 This specifies the amount of the image's height to use for its
4876 ascent---that is, the part above the baseline. The value,
4877 @var{ascent}, must be a number in the range 0 to 100, or the symbol
4878 @code{center}.
4879
4880 If @var{ascent} is a number, that percentage of the image's height is
4881 used for its ascent.
4882
4883 If @var{ascent} is @code{center}, the image is vertically centered
4884 around a centerline which would be the vertical centerline of text drawn
4885 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
4886 properties and overlays that apply to the image.
4887
4888 If this property is omitted, it defaults to 50.
4889
4890 @item :relief @var{relief}
4891 This adds a shadow rectangle around the image. The value,
4892 @var{relief}, specifies the width of the shadow lines, in pixels. If
4893 @var{relief} is negative, shadows are drawn so that the image appears
4894 as a pressed button; otherwise, it appears as an unpressed button.
4895
4896 @item :conversion @var{algorithm}
4897 This specifies a conversion algorithm that should be applied to the
4898 image before it is displayed; the value, @var{algorithm}, specifies
4899 which algorithm.
4900
4901 @table @code
4902 @item laplace
4903 @itemx emboss
4904 Specifies the Laplace edge detection algorithm, which blurs out small
4905 differences in color while highlighting larger differences. People
4906 sometimes consider this useful for displaying the image for a
4907 disabled button.
4908
4909 @item (edge-detection :matrix @var{matrix} :color-adjust @var{adjust})
4910 @cindex edge detection, images
4911 Specifies a general edge-detection algorithm. @var{matrix} must be
4912 either a nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel
4913 at position @math{x/y} in the transformed image is computed from
4914 original pixels around that position. @var{matrix} specifies, for each
4915 pixel in the neighborhood of @math{x/y}, a factor with which that pixel
4916 will influence the transformed pixel; element @math{0} specifies the
4917 factor for the pixel at @math{x-1/y-1}, element @math{1} the factor for
4918 the pixel at @math{x/y-1} etc., as shown below:
4919 @iftex
4920 @tex
4921 $$\pmatrix{x-1/y-1 & x/y-1 & x+1/y-1 \cr
4922 x-1/y & x/y & x+1/y \cr
4923 x-1/y+1& x/y+1 & x+1/y+1 \cr}$$
4924 @end tex
4925 @end iftex
4926 @ifnottex
4927 @display
4928 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4929 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4930 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4931 @end display
4932 @end ifnottex
4933
4934 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4935 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4936 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4937 of the factors' absolute values.
4938
4939 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4940 @iftex
4941 @tex
4942 $$\pmatrix{1 & 0 & 0 \cr
4943 0& 0 & 0 \cr
4944 0 & 0 & -1 \cr}$$
4945 @end tex
4946 @end iftex
4947 @ifnottex
4948 @display
4949 (1 0 0
4950 0 0 0
4951 0 0 -1)
4952 @end display
4953 @end ifnottex
4954
4955 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4956 @iftex
4957 @tex
4958 $$\pmatrix{ 2 & -1 & 0 \cr
4959 -1 & 0 & 1 \cr
4960 0 & 1 & -2 \cr}$$
4961 @end tex
4962 @end iftex
4963 @ifnottex
4964 @display
4965 ( 2 -1 0
4966 -1 0 1
4967 0 1 -2)
4968 @end display
4969 @end ifnottex
4970
4971 @item disabled
4972 Specifies transforming the image so that it looks disabled.
4973 @end table
4974
4975 @item :mask @var{mask}
4976 If @var{mask} is @code{heuristic} or @code{(heuristic @var{bg})}, build
4977 a clipping mask for the image, so that the background of a frame is
4978 visible behind the image. If @var{bg} is not specified, or if @var{bg}
4979 is @code{t}, determine the background color of the image by looking at
4980 the four corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occurring
4981 color from the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise,
4982 @var{bg} must be a list @code{(@var{red} @var{green} @var{blue})}
4983 specifying the color to assume for the background of the image.
4984
4985 If @var{mask} is @code{nil}, remove a mask from the image, if it has
4986 one. Images in some formats include a mask which can be removed by
4987 specifying @code{:mask nil}.
4988
4989 @item :pointer @var{shape}
4990 This specifies the pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this
4991 image. @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
4992
4993 @item :map @var{map}
4994 @cindex image maps
4995 This associates an image map of @dfn{hot spots} with this image.
4996
4997 An image map is an alist where each element has the format
4998 @code{(@var{area} @var{id} @var{plist})}. An @var{area} is specified
4999 as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon.
5000
5001 A rectangle is a cons
5002 @code{(rect . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . (@var{x1} . @var{y1})))}
5003 which specifies the pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right
5004 corners of the rectangle area.
5005
5006 A circle is a cons
5007 @code{(circle . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . @var{r}))}
5008 which specifies the center and the radius of the circle; @var{r} may
5009 be a float or integer.
5010
5011 A polygon is a cons
5012 @code{(poly . [@var{x0} @var{y0} @var{x1} @var{y1} ...])}
5013 where each pair in the vector describes one corner in the polygon.
5014
5015 When the mouse pointer lies on a hot-spot area of an image, the
5016 @var{plist} of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a @code{help-echo}
5017 property, that defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
5018 a @code{pointer} property, that defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
5019 it is on the hot-spot.
5020 @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
5021
5022 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, an
5023 event is composed by combining the @var{id} of the hot-spot with the
5024 mouse event; for instance, @code{[area4 mouse-1]} if the hot-spot's
5025 @var{id} is @code{area4}.
5026 @end table
5027
5028 @defun image-mask-p spec &optional frame
5029 This function returns @code{t} if image @var{spec} has a mask bitmap.
5030 @var{frame} is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
5031 @var{frame} @code{nil} or omitted means to use the selected frame
5032 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5033 @end defun
5034
5035 @node XBM Images
5036 @subsection XBM Images
5037 @cindex XBM
5038
5039 To use XBM format, specify @code{xbm} as the image type. This image
5040 format doesn't require an external library, so images of this type are
5041 always supported.
5042
5043 Additional image properties supported for the @code{xbm} image type are:
5044
5045 @table @code
5046 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5047 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5048 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5049 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5050 foreground color.
5051
5052 @item :background @var{background}
5053 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5054 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5055 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5056 background color.
5057 @end table
5058
5059 If you specify an XBM image using data within Emacs instead of an
5060 external file, use the following three properties:
5061
5062 @table @code
5063 @item :data @var{data}
5064 The value, @var{data}, specifies the contents of the image.
5065 There are three formats you can use for @var{data}:
5066
5067 @itemize @bullet
5068 @item
5069 A vector of strings or bool-vectors, each specifying one line of the
5070 image. Do specify @code{:height} and @code{:width}.
5071
5072 @item
5073 A string containing the same byte sequence as an XBM file would contain.
5074 You must not specify @code{:height} and @code{:width} in this case,
5075 because omitting them is what indicates the data has the format of an
5076 XBM file. The file contents specify the height and width of the image.
5077
5078 @item
5079 A string or a bool-vector containing the bits of the image (plus perhaps
5080 some extra bits at the end that will not be used). It should contain at
5081 least @var{width} * @code{height} bits. In this case, you must specify
5082 @code{:height} and @code{:width}, both to indicate that the string
5083 contains just the bits rather than a whole XBM file, and to specify the
5084 size of the image.
5085 @end itemize
5086
5087 @item :width @var{width}
5088 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image, in pixels.
5089
5090 @item :height @var{height}
5091 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
5092 @end table
5093
5094 @node XPM Images
5095 @subsection XPM Images
5096 @cindex XPM
5097
5098 To use XPM format, specify @code{xpm} as the image type. The
5099 additional image property @code{:color-symbols} is also meaningful with
5100 the @code{xpm} image type:
5101
5102 @table @code
5103 @item :color-symbols @var{symbols}
5104 The value, @var{symbols}, should be an alist whose elements have the
5105 form @code{(@var{name} . @var{color})}. In each element, @var{name} is
5106 the name of a color as it appears in the image file, and @var{color}
5107 specifies the actual color to use for displaying that name.
5108 @end table
5109
5110 @node PostScript Images
5111 @subsection PostScript Images
5112 @cindex postscript images
5113
5114 To use PostScript for an image, specify image type @code{postscript}.
5115 This works only if you have Ghostscript installed. You must always use
5116 these three properties:
5117
5118 @table @code
5119 @item :pt-width @var{width}
5120 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image measured in
5121 points (1/72 inch). @var{width} must be an integer.
5122
5123 @item :pt-height @var{height}
5124 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image in points
5125 (1/72 inch). @var{height} must be an integer.
5126
5127 @item :bounding-box @var{box}
5128 The value, @var{box}, must be a list or vector of four integers, which
5129 specifying the bounding box of the PostScript image, analogous to the
5130 @samp{BoundingBox} comment found in PostScript files.
5131
5132 @example
5133 %%BoundingBox: 22 171 567 738
5134 @end example
5135 @end table
5136
5137 @node ImageMagick Images
5138 @subsection ImageMagick Images
5139 @cindex ImageMagick images
5140 @cindex images, support for more formats
5141
5142 If you build Emacs with ImageMagick support, you can use the
5143 ImageMagick library to load many image formats (@pxref{File
5144 Conveniences,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). The image type symbol
5145 for images loaded via ImageMagick is @code{imagemagick}, regardless of
5146 the actual underlying image format.
5147
5148 @defun imagemagick-types
5149 This function returns a list of image file extensions supported by the
5150 current ImageMagick installation. Each list element is a symbol
5151 representing an internal ImageMagick name for an image type, such as
5152 @code{BMP} for @file{.bmp} images.
5153 @end defun
5154
5155 @defopt imagemagick-enabled-types
5156 The value of this variable is a list of ImageMagick image types which
5157 Emacs may attempt to render using ImageMagick. Each list element
5158 should be one of the symbols in the list returned by
5159 @code{imagemagick-types}, or an equivalent string. Alternatively, a
5160 value of @code{t} enables ImageMagick for all possible image types.
5161 Regardless of the value of this variable,
5162 @code{imagemagick-types-inhibit} (see below) takes precedence.
5163 @end defopt
5164
5165 @defopt imagemagick-types-inhibit
5166 The value of this variable lists the ImageMagick image types which
5167 should never be rendered using ImageMagick, regardless of the value of
5168 @code{imagemagick-enabled-types}. A value of @code{t} disables
5169 ImageMagick entirely.
5170 @end defopt
5171
5172 @defvar image-format-suffixes
5173 This variable is an alist mapping image types to file name extensions.
5174 Emacs uses this in conjunction with the @code{:format} image property
5175 (see below) to give a hint to the ImageMagick library as to the type
5176 of an image. Each element has the form @code{(@var{type}
5177 @var{extension})}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying an image
5178 content-type, and @var{extension} is a string that specifies the
5179 associated file name extension.
5180 @end defvar
5181
5182 Images loaded with ImageMagick support the following additional
5183 image descriptor properties:
5184
5185 @table @code
5186 @item :background @var{background}
5187 @var{background}, if non-@code{nil}, should be a string specifying a
5188 color, which is used as the image's background color if the image
5189 supports transparency. If the value is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5190 frame's background color.
5191
5192 @item :width @var{width}, :height @var{height}
5193 The @code{:width} and @code{:height} keywords are used for scaling the
5194 image. If only one of them is specified, the other one will be
5195 calculated so as to preserve the aspect ratio. If both are specified,
5196 aspect ratio may not be preserved.
5197
5198 @item :max-width @var{max-width}, :max-height @var{max-height}
5199 The @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} keywords are used for
5200 scaling if the size of the image of the image exceeds these values.
5201 If @code{:width} is set it will have precedence over @code{max-width},
5202 and if @code{:height} is set it will have precedence over
5203 @code{max-height}, but you can otherwise mix these keywords as you
5204 wish. @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} will always preserve
5205 the aspect ratio.
5206
5207 @item :scale @var{scale}
5208 This should be a number, where values higher than 1 means to increase
5209 the size, and lower means to decrease the size. For instance, a value
5210 of 0.25 will make the image a quarter size of what it originally was.
5211 If the scaling makes the image larger than specified by
5212 @code{:max-width} or @code{:max-height}, the resulting size will not
5213 exceed those two values. If both @code{:scale} and
5214 @code{:height}/@code{:width} are specified, the height/width will be
5215 adjusted by the specified scaling factor.
5216
5217 @item :format @var{type}
5218 The value, @var{type}, should be a symbol specifying the type of the
5219 image data, as found in @code{image-format-suffixes}. This is used
5220 when the image does not have an associated file name, to provide a
5221 hint to ImageMagick to help it detect the image type.
5222
5223 @item :rotation @var{angle}
5224 Specifies a rotation angle in degrees.
5225
5226 @item :index @var{frame}
5227 @c Doesn't work: http://debbugs.gnu.org/7978
5228 @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5229 @end table
5230
5231 @node SVG Images
5232 @subsection SVG Images
5233 @cindex SVG images
5234
5235 SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) is an XML format for specifying images.
5236 If you build Emacs with SVG support, you can create and manipulate
5237 these images with the following commands.
5238
5239 @defun svg-create width height &rest args
5240 Create a new, empty SVG image with the specified dimensions.
5241 @var{args} is an argument plist with you can specify following:
5242
5243 @table @code
5244 @item :stroke-width
5245 The default width (in pixels) of any lines created.
5246
5247 @item :stroke
5248 The default stroke color on any lines created.
5249 @end table
5250
5251 This function returns an SVG structure, and all the following commands
5252 work on that structure.
5253 @end defun
5254
5255 @defun svg-gradient svg id type stops
5256 Create a gradient in @var{svg} with identifier @var{id}. @var{type}
5257 specifies the gradient type, and can be either @code{linear} or
5258 @code{radial}. @var{stops} is a list of percentage/color pairs.
5259
5260 The following will create a linear gradient that goes from red at the
5261 start, to green 25% of the way, to blue at the end:
5262
5263 @lisp
5264 (svg-gradient svg "gradient1" 'linear
5265 '((0 . "red") (25 . "green") (100 . "blue")))
5266 @end lisp
5267
5268 The gradient created (and inserted into the SVG object) can later be
5269 used by all functions that create shapes.
5270 @end defun
5271
5272 All the following functions take an optional list of keyword
5273 parameters that alter the various attributes from their default
5274 values. Valid attributes include:
5275
5276 @table @code
5277 @item :stroke-width
5278 The width (in pixels) of lines drawn, and outlines around solid
5279 shapes.
5280
5281 @item :stroke-color
5282 The color of lines drawn, and outlines around solid shapes.
5283
5284 @item :fill-color
5285 The color used for solid shapes.
5286
5287 @item :id
5288 The identified of the shape.
5289
5290 @item :gradient
5291 If given, this should be the identifier of a previously defined
5292 gradient object.
5293 @end table
5294
5295 @defun svg-rectangle svg x y width height &rest args
5296 Add a rectangle to @var{svg} where the upper left corner is at
5297 position @var{x}/@var{y} and is of size @var{width}/@var{height}.
5298
5299 @lisp
5300 (svg-rectangle svg 100 100 500 500 :gradient "gradient1")
5301 @end lisp
5302 @end defun
5303
5304 @defun svg-circle svg x y radius &rest args
5305 Add a circle to @var{svg} where the center is at @var{x}/@var{y}
5306 and the radius is @var{radius}.
5307 @end defun
5308
5309 @defun svg-ellipse svg x y x-radius y-radius &rest args
5310 Add a circle to @var{svg} where the center is at @var{x}/@var{y} and
5311 the horizontal radius is @var{x-radius} and the vertical radius is
5312 @var{y-radius}.
5313 @end defun
5314
5315 @defun svg-line svg x1 y1 x2 y2 &rest args
5316 Add a line to @var{svg} that starts at @var{x1}/@var{y1} and extends
5317 to @var{x2}/@var{y2}.
5318 @end defun
5319
5320 @defun svg-polyline svg points &rest args
5321 Add a multiple segment line to @var{svg} that goes through
5322 @var{points}, which is a list of X/Y position pairs.
5323
5324 @lisp
5325 (svg-polyline svg '((200 . 100) (500 . 450) (80 . 100))
5326 :stroke-color "green")
5327 @end lisp
5328 @end defun
5329
5330 @defun svg-polygon svg points &rest args
5331 Add a polygon to @var{svg} where @var{points} is a list of X/Y pairs
5332 that describe the outer circumference of the polygon.
5333
5334 @lisp
5335 (svg-polygon svg '((100 . 100) (200 . 150) (150 . 90))
5336 :stroke-color "blue" :fill-color "red"")
5337 @end lisp
5338 @end defun
5339
5340 Finally, the @code{svg-image} takes an SVG object as its parameter and
5341 returns an image object suitable for use in functions like
5342 @code{insert-image}. Here's a complete example that creates and
5343 inserts an image with a circle:
5344
5345 @lisp
5346 (let ((svg (svg-create 400 400 :stroke-width 10)))
5347 (svg-gradient svg "gradient1" 'linear '((0 . "red") (100 . "blue")))
5348 (svg-circle svg 200 200 100 :gradient "gradient1" :stroke-color "green")
5349 (insert-image (svg-image svg)))
5350 @end lisp
5351
5352
5353 @node Other Image Types
5354 @subsection Other Image Types
5355 @cindex PBM
5356
5357 For PBM images, specify image type @code{pbm}. Color, gray-scale and
5358 monochromatic images are supported. For mono PBM images, two additional
5359 image properties are supported.
5360
5361 @table @code
5362 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5363 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5364 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5365 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5366 foreground color.
5367
5368 @item :background @var{background}
5369 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5370 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5371 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5372 background color.
5373 @end table
5374
5375 @noindent
5376 The remaining image types that Emacs can support are:
5377
5378 @table @asis
5379 @item GIF
5380 Image type @code{gif}.
5381 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5382
5383 @item JPEG
5384 Image type @code{jpeg}.
5385
5386 @item PNG
5387 Image type @code{png}.
5388
5389 @item TIFF
5390 Image type @code{tiff}.
5391 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5392 @end table
5393
5394 @node Defining Images
5395 @subsection Defining Images
5396 @cindex define image
5397
5398 The functions @code{create-image}, @code{defimage} and
5399 @code{find-image} provide convenient ways to create image descriptors.
5400
5401 @defun create-image file-or-data &optional type data-p &rest props
5402 This function creates and returns an image descriptor which uses the
5403 data in @var{file-or-data}. @var{file-or-data} can be a file name or
5404 a string containing the image data; @var{data-p} should be @code{nil}
5405 for the former case, non-@code{nil} for the latter case.
5406
5407 The optional argument @var{type} is a symbol specifying the image type.
5408 If @var{type} is omitted or @code{nil}, @code{create-image} tries to
5409 determine the image type from the file's first few bytes, or else
5410 from the file's name.
5411
5412 The remaining arguments, @var{props}, specify additional image
5413 properties---for example,
5414
5415 @c ':heuristic-mask' is not documented?
5416 @example
5417 (create-image "foo.xpm" 'xpm nil :heuristic-mask t)
5418 @end example
5419
5420 The function returns @code{nil} if images of this type are not
5421 supported. Otherwise it returns an image descriptor.
5422 @end defun
5423
5424 @defmac defimage symbol specs &optional doc
5425 This macro defines @var{symbol} as an image name. The arguments
5426 @var{specs} is a list which specifies how to display the image.
5427 The third argument, @var{doc}, is an optional documentation string.
5428
5429 Each argument in @var{specs} has the form of a property list, and each
5430 one should specify at least the @code{:type} property and either the
5431 @code{:file} or the @code{:data} property. The value of @code{:type}
5432 should be a symbol specifying the image type, the value of
5433 @code{:file} is the file to load the image from, and the value of
5434 @code{:data} is a string containing the actual image data. Here is an
5435 example:
5436
5437 @example
5438 (defimage test-image
5439 ((:type xpm :file "~/test1.xpm")
5440 (:type xbm :file "~/test1.xbm")))
5441 @end example
5442
5443 @code{defimage} tests each argument, one by one, to see if it is
5444 usable---that is, if the type is supported and the file exists. The
5445 first usable argument is used to make an image descriptor which is
5446 stored in @var{symbol}.
5447
5448 If none of the alternatives will work, then @var{symbol} is defined
5449 as @code{nil}.
5450 @end defmac
5451
5452 @defun image-property image property
5453 Return the value of @var{property} in @var{image}. Properties can be
5454 set by using @code{setf}. Setting a property to @code{nil} will
5455 remove the property from the image.
5456 @end defun
5457
5458 @defun find-image specs
5459 This function provides a convenient way to find an image satisfying one
5460 of a list of image specifications @var{specs}.
5461
5462 Each specification in @var{specs} is a property list with contents
5463 depending on image type. All specifications must at least contain the
5464 properties @code{:type @var{type}} and either @w{@code{:file @var{file}}}
5465 or @w{@code{:data @var{data}}}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying
5466 the image type, e.g., @code{xbm}, @var{file} is the file to load the
5467 image from, and @var{data} is a string containing the actual image data.
5468 The first specification in the list whose @var{type} is supported, and
5469 @var{file} exists, is used to construct the image specification to be
5470 returned. If no specification is satisfied, @code{nil} is returned.
5471
5472 The image is looked for in @code{image-load-path}.
5473 @end defun
5474
5475 @defopt image-load-path
5476 This variable's value is a list of locations in which to search for
5477 image files. If an element is a string or a variable symbol whose
5478 value is a string, the string is taken to be the name of a directory
5479 to search. If an element is a variable symbol whose value is a list,
5480 that is taken to be a list of directory names to search.
5481
5482 The default is to search in the @file{images} subdirectory of the
5483 directory specified by @code{data-directory}, then the directory
5484 specified by @code{data-directory}, and finally in the directories in
5485 @code{load-path}. Subdirectories are not automatically included in
5486 the search, so if you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to
5487 supply the subdirectory name explicitly. For example, to find the
5488 image @file{images/foo/bar.xpm} within @code{data-directory}, you
5489 should specify the image as follows:
5490
5491 @example
5492 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
5493 @end example
5494 @end defopt
5495
5496 @defun image-load-path-for-library library image &optional path no-error
5497 This function returns a suitable search path for images used by the
5498 Lisp package @var{library}.
5499
5500 The function searches for @var{image} first using @code{image-load-path},
5501 excluding @file{@code{data-directory}/images}, and then in
5502 @code{load-path}, followed by a path suitable for @var{library}, which
5503 includes @file{../../etc/images} and @file{../etc/images} relative to
5504 the library file itself, and finally in
5505 @file{@code{data-directory}/images}.
5506
5507 Then this function returns a list of directories which contains first
5508 the directory in which @var{image} was found, followed by the value of
5509 @code{load-path}. If @var{path} is given, it is used instead of
5510 @code{load-path}.
5511
5512 If @var{no-error} is non-@code{nil} and a suitable path can't be
5513 found, don't signal an error. Instead, return a list of directories as
5514 before, except that @code{nil} appears in place of the image directory.
5515
5516 Here is an example of using @code{image-load-path-for-library}:
5517
5518 @example
5519 (defvar image-load-path) ; shush compiler
5520 (let* ((load-path (image-load-path-for-library
5521 "mh-e" "mh-logo.xpm"))
5522 (image-load-path (cons (car load-path)
5523 image-load-path)))
5524 (mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons-init))
5525 @end example
5526 @end defun
5527
5528 @vindex image-scaling-factor
5529 Images are automatically scaled when created based on the
5530 @code{image-scaling-factor} variable. The value is either a floating
5531 point number (where numbers higher than 1 means to increase the size
5532 and lower means to shrink the size), or the symbol @code{auto}, which
5533 will compute a scaling factor based on the font pixel size.
5534
5535 @node Showing Images
5536 @subsection Showing Images
5537 @cindex show image
5538
5539 You can use an image descriptor by setting up the @code{display}
5540 property yourself, but it is easier to use the functions in this
5541 section.
5542
5543 @defun insert-image image &optional string area slice
5544 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point. The
5545 value @var{image} should be an image descriptor; it could be a value
5546 returned by @code{create-image}, or the value of a symbol defined with
5547 @code{defimage}. The argument @var{string} specifies the text to put
5548 in the buffer to hold the image. If it is omitted or @code{nil},
5549 @code{insert-image} uses @code{" "} by default.
5550
5551 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5552 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5553 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5554 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5555 buffer's text.
5556
5557 The argument @var{slice} specifies a slice of the image to insert. If
5558 @var{slice} is @code{nil} or omitted the whole image is inserted.
5559 Otherwise, @var{slice} is a list @code{(@var{x} @var{y} @var{width}
5560 @var{height})} which specifies the @var{x} and @var{y} positions and
5561 @var{width} and @var{height} of the image area to insert. Integer
5562 values are in units of pixels. A floating-point number in the range
5563 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height of the entire
5564 image.
5565
5566 Internally, this function inserts @var{string} in the buffer, and gives
5567 it a @code{display} property which specifies @var{image}. @xref{Display
5568 Property}.
5569 @end defun
5570
5571 @cindex slice, image
5572 @cindex image slice
5573 @defun insert-sliced-image image &optional string area rows cols
5574 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point, like
5575 @code{insert-image}, but splits the image into @var{rows}x@var{cols}
5576 equally sized slices.
5577
5578 Emacs displays each slice as a
5579 separate image, and allows more intuitive scrolling up/down, instead of
5580 jumping up/down the entire image when paging through a buffer that
5581 displays (large) images.
5582 @end defun
5583
5584 @defun put-image image pos &optional string area
5585 This function puts image @var{image} in front of @var{pos} in the
5586 current buffer. The argument @var{pos} should be an integer or a
5587 marker. It specifies the buffer position where the image should appear.
5588 The argument @var{string} specifies the text that should hold the image
5589 as an alternative to the default.
5590
5591 The argument @var{image} must be an image descriptor, perhaps returned
5592 by @code{create-image} or stored by @code{defimage}.
5593
5594 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5595 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5596 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5597 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5598 buffer's text.
5599
5600 Internally, this function creates an overlay, and gives it a
5601 @code{before-string} property containing text that has a @code{display}
5602 property whose value is the image. (Whew!)
5603 @end defun
5604
5605 @defun remove-images start end &optional buffer
5606 This function removes images in @var{buffer} between positions
5607 @var{start} and @var{end}. If @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil},
5608 images are removed from the current buffer.
5609
5610 This removes only images that were put into @var{buffer} the way
5611 @code{put-image} does it, not images that were inserted with
5612 @code{insert-image} or in other ways.
5613 @end defun
5614
5615 @defun image-size spec &optional pixels frame
5616 @cindex size of image
5617 This function returns the size of an image as a pair
5618 @w{@code{(@var{width} . @var{height})}}. @var{spec} is an image
5619 specification. @var{pixels} non-@code{nil} means return sizes measured
5620 in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in the default character size
5621 of @var{frame} (@pxref{Frame Font}). @var{frame} is the frame on which
5622 the image will be displayed. @var{frame} null or omitted means use the
5623 selected frame (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5624 @end defun
5625
5626 @defvar max-image-size
5627 This variable is used to define the maximum size of image that Emacs
5628 will load. Emacs will refuse to load (and display) any image that is
5629 larger than this limit.
5630
5631 If the value is an integer, it directly specifies the maximum
5632 image height and width, measured in pixels. If it is floating
5633 point, it specifies the maximum image height and width
5634 as a ratio to the frame height and width. If the value is
5635 non-numeric, there is no explicit limit on the size of images.
5636
5637 The purpose of this variable is to prevent unreasonably large images
5638 from accidentally being loaded into Emacs. It only takes effect the
5639 first time an image is loaded. Once an image is placed in the image
5640 cache, it can always be displayed, even if the value of
5641 @code{max-image-size} is subsequently changed (@pxref{Image Cache}).
5642 @end defvar
5643
5644 Images inserted with the insertion functions above also get a local
5645 keymap installed in the text properties (or overlays) that span the
5646 displayed image. This keymap defines the following commands:
5647
5648 @table @kbd
5649 @item +
5650 Increase the image size (@code{image-increase-size}). A prefix value
5651 of @samp{4} means to increase the size by 40%. The default is 20%.
5652
5653 @item -
5654 Decrease the image size (@code{image-increase-size}). A prefix value
5655 of @samp{4} means to decrease the size by 40%. The default is 20%.
5656
5657 @item r
5658 Rotate the image by 90 degrees (@code{image-rotate}).
5659
5660 @item o
5661 Save the image to a file (@code{image-save}).
5662 @end table
5663
5664 @node Multi-Frame Images
5665 @subsection Multi-Frame Images
5666 @cindex multi-frame images
5667
5668 @cindex animation
5669 @cindex image animation
5670 @cindex image frames
5671 Some image files can contain more than one image. We say that there
5672 are multiple ``frames'' in the image. At present, Emacs supports
5673 multiple frames for GIF, TIFF, and certain ImageMagick formats such as
5674 DJVM@.
5675
5676 The frames can be used either to represent multiple pages (this is
5677 usually the case with multi-frame TIFF files, for example), or to
5678 create animation (usually the case with multi-frame GIF files).
5679
5680 A multi-frame image has a property @code{:index}, whose value is an
5681 integer (counting from 0) that specifies which frame is being displayed.
5682
5683 @defun image-multi-frame-p image
5684 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{image} contains more than
5685 one frame. The actual return value is a cons @code{(@var{nimages}
5686 . @var{delay})}, where @var{nimages} is the number of frames and
5687 @var{delay} is the delay in seconds between them, or @code{nil}
5688 if the image does not specify a delay. Images that are intended to be
5689 animated usually specify a frame delay, whereas ones that are intended
5690 to be treated as multiple pages do not.
5691 @end defun
5692
5693 @defun image-current-frame image
5694 This function returns the index of the current frame number for
5695 @var{image}, counting from 0.
5696 @end defun
5697
5698 @defun image-show-frame image n &optional nocheck
5699 This function switches @var{image} to frame number @var{n}. It
5700 replaces a frame number outside the valid range with that of the end
5701 of the range, unless @var{nocheck} is non-@code{nil}. If @var{image}
5702 does not contain a frame with the specified number, the image displays
5703 as a hollow box.
5704 @end defun
5705
5706 @defun image-animate image &optional index limit
5707 This function animates @var{image}. The optional integer @var{index}
5708 specifies the frame from which to start (default 0). The optional
5709 argument @var{limit} controls the length of the animation. If omitted
5710 or @code{nil}, the image animates once only; if @code{t} it loops
5711 forever; if a number animation stops after that many seconds.
5712 @end defun
5713
5714 @vindex image-minimum-frame-delay
5715 @vindex image-default-frame-delay
5716 @noindent Animation operates by means of a timer. Note that Emacs imposes a
5717 minimum frame delay of 0.01 (@code{image-minimum-frame-delay}) seconds.
5718 If the image itself does not specify a delay, Emacs uses
5719 @code{image-default-frame-delay}.
5720
5721 @defun image-animate-timer image
5722 This function returns the timer responsible for animating @var{image},
5723 if there is one.
5724 @end defun
5725
5726
5727 @node Image Cache
5728 @subsection Image Cache
5729 @cindex image cache
5730
5731 Emacs caches images so that it can display them again more
5732 efficiently. When Emacs displays an image, it searches the image
5733 cache for an existing image specification @code{equal} to the desired
5734 specification. If a match is found, the image is displayed from the
5735 cache. Otherwise, Emacs loads the image normally.
5736
5737 @defun image-flush spec &optional frame
5738 This function removes the image with specification @var{spec} from the
5739 image cache of frame @var{frame}. Image specifications are compared
5740 using @code{equal}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5741 selected frame. If @var{frame} is @code{t}, the image is flushed on
5742 all existing frames.
5743
5744 In Emacs's current implementation, each graphical terminal possesses an
5745 image cache, which is shared by all the frames on that terminal
5746 (@pxref{Multiple Terminals}). Thus, refreshing an image in one frame
5747 also refreshes it in all other frames on the same terminal.
5748 @end defun
5749
5750 One use for @code{image-flush} is to tell Emacs about a change in an
5751 image file. If an image specification contains a @code{:file}
5752 property, the image is cached based on the file's contents when the
5753 image is first displayed. Even if the file subsequently changes,
5754 Emacs continues displaying the old version of the image. Calling
5755 @code{image-flush} flushes the image from the cache, forcing Emacs to
5756 re-read the file the next time it needs to display that image.
5757
5758 Another use for @code{image-flush} is for memory conservation. If
5759 your Lisp program creates a large number of temporary images over a
5760 period much shorter than @code{image-cache-eviction-delay} (see
5761 below), you can opt to flush unused images yourself, instead of
5762 waiting for Emacs to do it automatically.
5763
5764 @defun clear-image-cache &optional filter
5765 This function clears an image cache, removing all the images stored in
5766 it. If @var{filter} is omitted or @code{nil}, it clears the cache for
5767 the selected frame. If @var{filter} is a frame, it clears the cache
5768 for that frame. If @var{filter} is @code{t}, all image caches are
5769 cleared. Otherwise, @var{filter} is taken to be a file name, and all
5770 images associated with that file name are removed from all image
5771 caches.
5772 @end defun
5773
5774 If an image in the image cache has not been displayed for a specified
5775 period of time, Emacs removes it from the cache and frees the
5776 associated memory.
5777
5778 @defvar image-cache-eviction-delay
5779 This variable specifies the number of seconds an image can remain in
5780 the cache without being displayed. When an image is not displayed for
5781 this length of time, Emacs removes it from the image cache.
5782
5783 Under some circumstances, if the number of images in the cache grows
5784 too large, the actual eviction delay may be shorter than this.
5785
5786 If the value is @code{nil}, Emacs does not remove images from the cache
5787 except when you explicitly clear it. This mode can be useful for
5788 debugging.
5789 @end defvar
5790
5791 @node Xwidgets
5792 @section Embedded Native Widgets
5793 @cindex xwidget
5794 @cindex embedded widgets
5795 @cindex webkit browser widget
5796
5797 Emacs is able to display native widgets, such as GTK WebKit widgets,
5798 in Emacs buffers when it was built with the necessary support
5799 libraries and is running on a graphical terminal. To test whether
5800 Emacs supports display of embedded widgets, check that the
5801 @code{xwidget-internal} feature is available (@pxref{Named Features}).
5802
5803 To display an embedded widget in a buffer, you must first create an
5804 xwidget object, and then use that object as the display specifier
5805 in a @code{display} text or overlay property (@pxref{Display
5806 Property}).
5807
5808 @defun make-xwidget type title width height arguments &optional buffer
5809 This creates and returns an xwidget object. If
5810 @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current
5811 buffer. If @var{buffer} names a buffer that doesn't exist, it will be
5812 created. The @var{type} identifies the type of the xwidget component,
5813 it can be one of the following:
5814
5815 @table @code
5816 @item webkit
5817 The WebKit component.
5818 @end table
5819
5820 The @var{width} and @var{height} arguments specify the widget size in
5821 pixels, and @var{title}, a string, specifies its title.
5822 @end defun
5823
5824 @defun xwidgetp object
5825 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an xwidget,
5826 @code{nil} otherwise.
5827 @end defun
5828
5829 @defun xwidget-plist xwidget
5830 This function returns the property list of @var{xwidget}.
5831 @end defun
5832
5833 @defun set-xwidget-plist xwidget plist
5834 This function replaces the property list of @var{xwidget} with a new
5835 property list given by @var{plist}.
5836 @end defun
5837
5838 @defun xwidget-buffer xwidget
5839 This function returns the buffer of @var{xwidget}.
5840 @end defun
5841
5842 @defun get-buffer-xwidgets buffer
5843 This function returns a list of xwidget objects associated with the
5844 @var{buffer}, which can be specified as a buffer object or a name of
5845 an existing buffer, a string. The value is @code{nil} if @var{buffer}
5846 contains no xwidgets.
5847 @end defun
5848
5849 @defun xwidget-webkit-goto-uri xwidget uri
5850 This function browses the specified @var{uri} in the given
5851 @var{xwidget}. The @var{uri} is a string that specifies the name of a
5852 file or a URL. @c FIXME: What else can a URI specify in this context?
5853 @end defun
5854
5855 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script xwidget script
5856 This function causes the browser widget specified by @var{xwidget} to
5857 execute the specified JavaScript @code{script}.
5858 @end defun
5859
5860 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script-rv xwidget script &optional default
5861 This function executes the specified @var{script} like
5862 @code{xwidget-webkit-execute-script} does, but it also returns the
5863 script's return value as a string. If @var{script} doesn't return a
5864 value, this function returns @var{default}, or @code{nil} if
5865 @var{default} was omitted.
5866 @end defun
5867
5868 @defun xwidget-webkit-get-title xwidget
5869 This function returns the title of @var{xwidget} as a string.
5870 @end defun
5871
5872 @defun xwidget-resize xwidget width height
5873 This function resizes the specified @var{xwidget} to the size
5874 @var{width}x@var{height} pixels.
5875 @end defun
5876
5877 @defun xwidget-size-request xwidget
5878 This function returns the desired size of @var{xwidget} as a list of
5879 the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height})}. The dimensions are in
5880 pixels.
5881 @end defun
5882
5883 @defun xwidget-info xwidget
5884 This function returns the attributes of @var{xwidget} as a vector of
5885 the form @code{[@var{type} @var{title} @var{width} @var{height}]}.
5886 The attributes are usually determined by @code{make-xwidget} when the
5887 xwidget is created.
5888 @end defun
5889
5890 @defun set-xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget flag
5891 This function allows you to arrange that Emacs will ask the user for
5892 confirmation before exiting or before killing a buffer that has
5893 @var{xwidget} associated with it. If @var{flag} is non-@code{nil},
5894 Emacs will query the user, otherwise it will not.
5895 @end defun
5896
5897 @defun xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget
5898 This function returns the current setting of @var{xwidget}s
5899 query-on-exit flag, either @code{t} or @code{nil}.
5900 @end defun
5901
5902 @node Buttons
5903 @section Buttons
5904 @cindex buttons in buffers
5905 @cindex clickable buttons in buffers
5906
5907 The Button package defines functions for inserting and manipulating
5908 @dfn{buttons} that can be activated with the mouse or via keyboard
5909 commands. These buttons are typically used for various kinds of
5910 hyperlinks.
5911
5912 A button is essentially a set of text or overlay properties,
5913 attached to a stretch of text in a buffer. These properties are
5914 called @dfn{button properties}. One of these properties, the
5915 @dfn{action property}, specifies a function which is called when the
5916 user invokes the button using the keyboard or the mouse. The action
5917 function may examine the button and use its other properties as
5918 desired.
5919
5920 In some ways, the Button package duplicates the functionality in the
5921 Widget package. @xref{Top, , Introduction, widget, The Emacs Widget
5922 Library}. The advantage of the Button package is that it is faster,
5923 smaller, and simpler to program. From the point of view of the user,
5924 the interfaces produced by the two packages are very similar.
5925
5926 @menu
5927 * Button Properties:: Button properties with special meanings.
5928 * Button Types:: Defining common properties for classes of buttons.
5929 * Making Buttons:: Adding buttons to Emacs buffers.
5930 * Manipulating Buttons:: Getting and setting properties of buttons.
5931 * Button Buffer Commands:: Buffer-wide commands and bindings for buttons.
5932 @end menu
5933
5934 @node Button Properties
5935 @subsection Button Properties
5936 @cindex button properties
5937
5938 Each button has an associated list of properties defining its
5939 appearance and behavior, and other arbitrary properties may be used
5940 for application specific purposes. The following properties have
5941 special meaning to the Button package:
5942
5943 @table @code
5944 @item action
5945 @kindex action @r{(button property)}
5946 The function to call when the user invokes the button, which is passed
5947 the single argument @var{button}. By default this is @code{ignore},
5948 which does nothing.
5949
5950 @item mouse-action
5951 @kindex mouse-action @r{(button property)}
5952 This is similar to @code{action}, and when present, will be used
5953 instead of @code{action} for button invocations resulting from
5954 mouse-clicks (instead of the user hitting @key{RET}). If not
5955 present, mouse-clicks use @code{action} instead.
5956
5957 @item face
5958 @kindex face @r{(button property)}
5959 This is an Emacs face controlling how buttons of this type are
5960 displayed; by default this is the @code{button} face.
5961
5962 @item mouse-face
5963 @kindex mouse-face @r{(button property)}
5964 This is an additional face which controls appearance during
5965 mouse-overs (merged with the usual button face); by default this is
5966 the usual Emacs @code{highlight} face.
5967
5968 @item keymap
5969 @kindex keymap @r{(button property)}
5970 The button's keymap, defining bindings active within the button
5971 region. By default this is the usual button region keymap, stored
5972 in the variable @code{button-map}, which defines @key{RET} and
5973 @key{mouse-2} to invoke the button.
5974
5975 @item type
5976 @kindex type @r{(button property)}
5977 The button type. @xref{Button Types}.
5978
5979 @item help-echo
5980 @kindex help-index @r{(button property)}
5981 A string displayed by the Emacs tool-tip help system; by default,
5982 @code{"mouse-2, RET: Push this button"}.
5983
5984 @item follow-link
5985 @kindex follow-link @r{(button property)}
5986 The follow-link property, defining how a @key{Mouse-1} click behaves
5987 on this button, @xref{Clickable Text}.
5988
5989 @item button
5990 @kindex button @r{(button property)}
5991 All buttons have a non-@code{nil} @code{button} property, which may be useful
5992 in finding regions of text that comprise buttons (which is what the
5993 standard button functions do).
5994 @end table
5995
5996 There are other properties defined for the regions of text in a
5997 button, but these are not generally interesting for typical uses.
5998
5999 @node Button Types
6000 @subsection Button Types
6001 @cindex button types
6002
6003 Every button has a @dfn{button type}, which defines default values
6004 for the button's properties. Button types are arranged in a
6005 hierarchy, with specialized types inheriting from more general types,
6006 so that it's easy to define special-purpose types of buttons for
6007 specific tasks.
6008
6009 @defun define-button-type name &rest properties
6010 Define a button type called @var{name} (a symbol).
6011 The remaining arguments
6012 form a sequence of @var{property value} pairs, specifying default
6013 property values for buttons with this type (a button's type may be set
6014 by giving it a @code{type} property when creating the button, using
6015 the @code{:type} keyword argument).
6016
6017 In addition, the keyword argument @code{:supertype} may be used to
6018 specify a button-type from which @var{name} inherits its default
6019 property values. Note that this inheritance happens only when
6020 @var{name} is defined; subsequent changes to a supertype are not
6021 reflected in its subtypes.
6022 @end defun
6023
6024 Using @code{define-button-type} to define default properties for
6025 buttons is not necessary---buttons without any specified type use the
6026 built-in button-type @code{button}---but it is encouraged, since
6027 doing so usually makes the resulting code clearer and more efficient.
6028
6029 @node Making Buttons
6030 @subsection Making Buttons
6031 @cindex making buttons
6032
6033 Buttons are associated with a region of text, using an overlay or
6034 text properties to hold button-specific information, all of which are
6035 initialized from the button's type (which defaults to the built-in
6036 button type @code{button}). Like all Emacs text, the appearance of
6037 the button is governed by the @code{face} property; by default (via
6038 the @code{face} property inherited from the @code{button} button-type)
6039 this is a simple underline, like a typical web-page link.
6040
6041 For convenience, there are two sorts of button-creation functions,
6042 those that add button properties to an existing region of a buffer,
6043 called @code{make-...button}, and those that also insert the button
6044 text, called @code{insert-...button}.
6045
6046 The button-creation functions all take the @code{&rest} argument
6047 @var{properties}, which should be a sequence of @var{property value}
6048 pairs, specifying properties to add to the button; see @ref{Button
6049 Properties}. In addition, the keyword argument @code{:type} may be
6050 used to specify a button-type from which to inherit other properties;
6051 see @ref{Button Types}. Any properties not explicitly specified
6052 during creation will be inherited from the button's type (if the type
6053 defines such a property).
6054
6055 The following functions add a button using an overlay
6056 (@pxref{Overlays}) to hold the button properties:
6057
6058 @defun make-button beg end &rest properties
6059 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the
6060 current buffer, and returns it.
6061 @end defun
6062
6063 @defun insert-button label &rest properties
6064 This insert a button with the label @var{label} at point,
6065 and returns it.
6066 @end defun
6067
6068 The following functions are similar, but using text properties
6069 (@pxref{Text Properties}) to hold the button properties. Such buttons
6070 do not add markers to the buffer, so editing in the buffer does not
6071 slow down if there is an extremely large numbers of buttons. However,
6072 if there is an existing face text property on the text (e.g., a face
6073 assigned by Font Lock mode), the button face may not be visible. Both
6074 of these functions return the starting position of the new button.
6075
6076 @defun make-text-button beg end &rest properties
6077 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the current buffer,
6078 using text properties.
6079 @end defun
6080
6081 @defun insert-text-button label &rest properties
6082 This inserts a button with the label @var{label} at point, using text
6083 properties.
6084 @end defun
6085
6086 @node Manipulating Buttons
6087 @subsection Manipulating Buttons
6088 @cindex manipulating buttons
6089
6090 These are functions for getting and setting properties of buttons.
6091 Often these are used by a button's invocation function to determine
6092 what to do.
6093
6094 Where a @var{button} parameter is specified, it means an object
6095 referring to a specific button, either an overlay (for overlay
6096 buttons), or a buffer-position or marker (for text property buttons).
6097 Such an object is passed as the first argument to a button's
6098 invocation function when it is invoked.
6099
6100 @defun button-start button
6101 Return the position at which @var{button} starts.
6102 @end defun
6103
6104 @defun button-end button
6105 Return the position at which @var{button} ends.
6106 @end defun
6107
6108 @defun button-get button prop
6109 Get the property of button @var{button} named @var{prop}.
6110 @end defun
6111
6112 @defun button-put button prop val
6113 Set @var{button}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
6114 @end defun
6115
6116 @defun button-activate button &optional use-mouse-action
6117 Call @var{button}'s @code{action} property (i.e., invoke the function
6118 that is the value of that property, passing it the single argument
6119 @var{button}). If @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, try to
6120 invoke the button's @code{mouse-action} property instead of
6121 @code{action}; if the button has no @code{mouse-action} property, use
6122 @code{action} as normal.
6123 @end defun
6124
6125 @defun button-label button
6126 Return @var{button}'s text label.
6127 @end defun
6128
6129 @defun button-type button
6130 Return @var{button}'s button-type.
6131 @end defun
6132
6133 @defun button-has-type-p button type
6134 Return @code{t} if @var{button} has button-type @var{type}, or one of
6135 @var{type}'s subtypes.
6136 @end defun
6137
6138 @defun button-at pos
6139 Return the button at position @var{pos} in the current buffer, or
6140 @code{nil}. If the button at @var{pos} is a text property button, the
6141 return value is a marker pointing to @var{pos}.
6142 @end defun
6143
6144 @defun button-type-put type prop val
6145 Set the button-type @var{type}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
6146 @end defun
6147
6148 @defun button-type-get type prop
6149 Get the property of button-type @var{type} named @var{prop}.
6150 @end defun
6151
6152 @defun button-type-subtype-p type supertype
6153 Return @code{t} if button-type @var{type} is a subtype of @var{supertype}.
6154 @end defun
6155
6156 @node Button Buffer Commands
6157 @subsection Button Buffer Commands
6158 @cindex button buffer commands
6159
6160 These are commands and functions for locating and operating on
6161 buttons in an Emacs buffer.
6162
6163 @code{push-button} is the command that a user uses to actually push
6164 a button, and is bound by default in the button itself to @key{RET}
6165 and to @key{mouse-2} using a local keymap in the button's overlay or
6166 text properties. Commands that are useful outside the buttons itself,
6167 such as @code{forward-button} and @code{backward-button} are
6168 additionally available in the keymap stored in
6169 @code{button-buffer-map}; a mode which uses buttons may want to use
6170 @code{button-buffer-map} as a parent keymap for its keymap.
6171
6172 If the button has a non-@code{nil} @code{follow-link} property, and
6173 @code{mouse-1-click-follows-link} is set, a quick @key{Mouse-1} click
6174 will also activate the @code{push-button} command.
6175 @xref{Clickable Text}.
6176
6177 @deffn Command push-button &optional pos use-mouse-action
6178 Perform the action specified by a button at location @var{pos}.
6179 @var{pos} may be either a buffer position or a mouse-event. If
6180 @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, or @var{pos} is a
6181 mouse-event (@pxref{Mouse Events}), try to invoke the button's
6182 @code{mouse-action} property instead of @code{action}; if the button
6183 has no @code{mouse-action} property, use @code{action} as normal.
6184 @var{pos} defaults to point, except when @code{push-button} is invoked
6185 interactively as the result of a mouse-event, in which case, the mouse
6186 event's position is used. If there's no button at @var{pos}, do
6187 nothing and return @code{nil}, otherwise return @code{t}.
6188 @end deffn
6189
6190 @deffn Command forward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6191 Move to the @var{n}th next button, or @var{n}th previous button if
6192 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6193 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6194 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6195 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6196 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6197 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6198 @end deffn
6199
6200 @deffn Command backward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6201 Move to the @var{n}th previous button, or @var{n}th next button if
6202 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6203 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6204 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6205 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6206 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6207 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6208 @end deffn
6209
6210 @defun next-button pos &optional count-current
6211 @defunx previous-button pos &optional count-current
6212 Return the next button after (for @code{next-button}) or before (for
6213 @code{previous-button}) position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If
6214 @var{count-current} is non-@code{nil}, count any button at @var{pos}
6215 in the search, instead of starting at the next button.
6216 @end defun
6217
6218 @node Abstract Display
6219 @section Abstract Display
6220 @cindex ewoc
6221 @cindex display, abstract
6222 @cindex display, arbitrary objects
6223 @cindex model/view/controller
6224 @cindex view part, model/view/controller
6225
6226 The Ewoc package constructs buffer text that represents a structure
6227 of Lisp objects, and updates the text to follow changes in that
6228 structure. This is like the ``view'' component in the
6229 ``model--view--controller'' design paradigm. Ewoc means ``Emacs's
6230 Widget for Object Collections''.
6231
6232 An @dfn{ewoc} is a structure that organizes information required to
6233 construct buffer text that represents certain Lisp data. The buffer
6234 text of the ewoc has three parts, in order: first, fixed @dfn{header}
6235 text; next, textual descriptions of a series of data elements (Lisp
6236 objects that you specify); and last, fixed @dfn{footer} text.
6237 Specifically, an ewoc contains information on:
6238
6239 @itemize @bullet
6240 @item
6241 The buffer which its text is generated in.
6242
6243 @item
6244 The text's start position in the buffer.
6245
6246 @item
6247 The header and footer strings.
6248
6249 @item
6250 @cindex node, ewoc
6251 @c or "@cindex node, abstract display"?
6252 A doubly-linked chain of @dfn{nodes}, each of which contains:
6253
6254 @itemize
6255 @item
6256 A @dfn{data element}, a single Lisp object.
6257
6258 @item
6259 Links to the preceding and following nodes in the chain.
6260 @end itemize
6261
6262 @item
6263 A @dfn{pretty-printer} function which is responsible for
6264 inserting the textual representation of a data
6265 element value into the current buffer.
6266 @end itemize
6267
6268 Typically, you define an ewoc with @code{ewoc-create}, and then pass
6269 the resulting ewoc structure to other functions in the Ewoc package to
6270 build nodes within it, and display it in the buffer. Once it is
6271 displayed in the buffer, other functions determine the correspondence
6272 between buffer positions and nodes, move point from one node's textual
6273 representation to another, and so forth. @xref{Abstract Display
6274 Functions}.
6275
6276 @cindex encapsulation, ewoc
6277 @c or "@cindex encapsulation, abstract display"?
6278 A node @dfn{encapsulates} a data element much the way a variable
6279 holds a value. Normally, encapsulation occurs as a part of adding a
6280 node to the ewoc. You can retrieve the data element value and place a
6281 new value in its place, like so:
6282
6283 @lisp
6284 (ewoc-data @var{node})
6285 @result{} value
6286
6287 (ewoc-set-data @var{node} @var{new-value})
6288 @result{} @var{new-value}
6289 @end lisp
6290
6291 @noindent
6292 You can also use, as the data element value, a Lisp object (list or
6293 vector) that is a container for the real value, or an index into
6294 some other structure. The example (@pxref{Abstract Display Example})
6295 uses the latter approach.
6296
6297 When the data changes, you will want to update the text in the
6298 buffer. You can update all nodes by calling @code{ewoc-refresh}, or
6299 just specific nodes using @code{ewoc-invalidate}, or all nodes
6300 satisfying a predicate using @code{ewoc-map}. Alternatively, you can
6301 delete invalid nodes using @code{ewoc-delete} or @code{ewoc-filter},
6302 and add new nodes in their place. Deleting a node from an ewoc deletes
6303 its associated textual description from buffer, as well.
6304
6305 @menu
6306 * Abstract Display Functions:: Functions in the Ewoc package.
6307 * Abstract Display Example:: Example of using Ewoc.
6308 @end menu
6309
6310 @node Abstract Display Functions
6311 @subsection Abstract Display Functions
6312
6313 In this subsection, @var{ewoc} and @var{node} stand for the
6314 structures described above (@pxref{Abstract Display}), while
6315 @var{data} stands for an arbitrary Lisp object used as a data element.
6316
6317 @defun ewoc-create pretty-printer &optional header footer nosep
6318 This constructs and returns a new ewoc, with no nodes (and thus no data
6319 elements). @var{pretty-printer} should be a function that takes one
6320 argument, a data element of the sort you plan to use in this ewoc, and
6321 inserts its textual description at point using @code{insert} (and never
6322 @code{insert-before-markers}, because that would interfere with the
6323 Ewoc package's internal mechanisms).
6324
6325 Normally, a newline is automatically inserted after the header,
6326 the footer and every node's textual description. If @var{nosep}
6327 is non-@code{nil}, no newline is inserted. This may be useful for
6328 displaying an entire ewoc on a single line, for example, or for
6329 making nodes invisible by arranging for @var{pretty-printer}
6330 to do nothing for those nodes.
6331
6332 An ewoc maintains its text in the buffer that is current when
6333 you create it, so switch to the intended buffer before calling
6334 @code{ewoc-create}.
6335 @end defun
6336
6337 @defun ewoc-buffer ewoc
6338 This returns the buffer where @var{ewoc} maintains its text.
6339 @end defun
6340
6341 @defun ewoc-get-hf ewoc
6342 This returns a cons cell @code{(@var{header} . @var{footer})}
6343 made from @var{ewoc}'s header and footer.
6344 @end defun
6345
6346 @defun ewoc-set-hf ewoc header footer
6347 This sets the header and footer of @var{ewoc} to the strings
6348 @var{header} and @var{footer}, respectively.
6349 @end defun
6350
6351 @defun ewoc-enter-first ewoc data
6352 @defunx ewoc-enter-last ewoc data
6353 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, putting it, respectively,
6354 at the beginning or end of @var{ewoc}'s chain of nodes.
6355 @end defun
6356
6357 @defun ewoc-enter-before ewoc node data
6358 @defunx ewoc-enter-after ewoc node data
6359 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, adding it to
6360 @var{ewoc} before or after @var{node}, respectively.
6361 @end defun
6362
6363 @defun ewoc-prev ewoc node
6364 @defunx ewoc-next ewoc node
6365 These return, respectively, the previous node and the next node of @var{node}
6366 in @var{ewoc}.
6367 @end defun
6368
6369 @defun ewoc-nth ewoc n
6370 This returns the node in @var{ewoc} found at zero-based index @var{n}.
6371 A negative @var{n} means count from the end. @code{ewoc-nth} returns
6372 @code{nil} if @var{n} is out of range.
6373 @end defun
6374
6375 @defun ewoc-data node
6376 This extracts the data encapsulated by @var{node} and returns it.
6377 @end defun
6378
6379 @defun ewoc-set-data node data
6380 This sets the data encapsulated by @var{node} to @var{data}.
6381 @end defun
6382
6383 @defun ewoc-locate ewoc &optional pos guess
6384 This determines the node in @var{ewoc} which contains point (or
6385 @var{pos} if specified), and returns that node. If @var{ewoc} has no
6386 nodes, it returns @code{nil}. If @var{pos} is before the first node,
6387 it returns the first node; if @var{pos} is after the last node, it returns
6388 the last node. The optional third arg @var{guess}
6389 should be a node that is likely to be near @var{pos}; this doesn't
6390 alter the result, but makes the function run faster.
6391 @end defun
6392
6393 @defun ewoc-location node
6394 This returns the start position of @var{node}.
6395 @end defun
6396
6397 @defun ewoc-goto-prev ewoc arg
6398 @defunx ewoc-goto-next ewoc arg
6399 These move point to the previous or next, respectively, @var{arg}th node
6400 in @var{ewoc}. @code{ewoc-goto-prev} does not move if it is already at
6401 the first node or if @var{ewoc} is empty, whereas @code{ewoc-goto-next}
6402 moves past the last node, returning @code{nil}. Excepting this special
6403 case, these functions return the node moved to.
6404 @end defun
6405
6406 @defun ewoc-goto-node ewoc node
6407 This moves point to the start of @var{node} in @var{ewoc}.
6408 @end defun
6409
6410 @defun ewoc-refresh ewoc
6411 This function regenerates the text of @var{ewoc}. It works by
6412 deleting the text between the header and the footer, i.e., all the
6413 data elements' representations, and then calling the pretty-printer
6414 function for each node, one by one, in order.
6415 @end defun
6416
6417 @defun ewoc-invalidate ewoc &rest nodes
6418 This is similar to @code{ewoc-refresh}, except that only @var{nodes} in
6419 @var{ewoc} are updated instead of the entire set.
6420 @end defun
6421
6422 @defun ewoc-delete ewoc &rest nodes
6423 This deletes each node in @var{nodes} from @var{ewoc}.
6424 @end defun
6425
6426 @defun ewoc-filter ewoc predicate &rest args
6427 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6428 deletes those nodes for which @var{predicate} returns @code{nil}.
6429 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6430 @end defun
6431
6432 @defun ewoc-collect ewoc predicate &rest args
6433 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc}
6434 and returns a list of those elements for which @var{predicate}
6435 returns non-@code{nil}. The elements in the list are ordered
6436 as in the buffer. Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6437 @end defun
6438
6439 @defun ewoc-map map-function ewoc &rest args
6440 This calls @var{map-function} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6441 updates those nodes for which @var{map-function} returns non-@code{nil}.
6442 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{map-function}.
6443 @end defun
6444
6445 @node Abstract Display Example
6446 @subsection Abstract Display Example
6447
6448 Here is a simple example using functions of the ewoc package to
6449 implement a @dfn{color components} display, an area in a buffer that
6450 represents a vector of three integers (itself representing a 24-bit RGB
6451 value) in various ways.
6452
6453 @example
6454 (setq colorcomp-ewoc nil
6455 colorcomp-data nil
6456 colorcomp-mode-map nil
6457 colorcomp-labels ["Red" "Green" "Blue"])
6458
6459 (defun colorcomp-pp (data)
6460 (if data
6461 (let ((comp (aref colorcomp-data data)))
6462 (insert (aref colorcomp-labels data) "\t: #x"
6463 (format "%02X" comp) " "
6464 (make-string (ash comp -2) ?#) "\n"))
6465 (let ((cstr (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6466 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6467 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6468 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6469 (samp " (sample text) "))
6470 (insert "Color\t: "
6471 (propertize samp 'face
6472 `(foreground-color . ,cstr))
6473 (propertize samp 'face
6474 `(background-color . ,cstr))
6475 "\n"))))
6476
6477 (defun colorcomp (color)
6478 "Allow fiddling with COLOR in a new buffer.
6479 The buffer is in Color Components mode."
6480 (interactive "sColor (name or #RGB or #RRGGBB): ")
6481 (when (string= "" color)
6482 (setq color "green"))
6483 (unless (color-values color)
6484 (error "No such color: %S" color))
6485 (switch-to-buffer
6486 (generate-new-buffer (format "originally: %s" color)))
6487 (kill-all-local-variables)
6488 (setq major-mode 'colorcomp-mode
6489 mode-name "Color Components")
6490 (use-local-map colorcomp-mode-map)
6491 (erase-buffer)
6492 (buffer-disable-undo)
6493 (let ((data (apply 'vector (mapcar (lambda (n) (ash n -8))
6494 (color-values color))))
6495 (ewoc (ewoc-create 'colorcomp-pp
6496 "\nColor Components\n\n"
6497 (substitute-command-keys
6498 "\n\\@{colorcomp-mode-map@}"))))
6499 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-data) data)
6500 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-ewoc) ewoc)
6501 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 0)
6502 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 1)
6503 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 2)
6504 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc nil)))
6505 @end example
6506
6507 @cindex controller part, model/view/controller
6508 This example can be extended to be a color selection widget (in
6509 other words, the ``controller'' part of the ``model--view--controller''
6510 design paradigm) by defining commands to modify @code{colorcomp-data}
6511 and to finish the selection process, and a keymap to tie it all
6512 together conveniently.
6513
6514 @smallexample
6515 (defun colorcomp-mod (index limit delta)
6516 (let ((cur (aref colorcomp-data index)))
6517 (unless (= limit cur)
6518 (aset colorcomp-data index (+ cur delta)))
6519 (ewoc-invalidate
6520 colorcomp-ewoc
6521 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc index)
6522 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc -1))))
6523
6524 (defun colorcomp-R-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 255 1))
6525 (defun colorcomp-G-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 255 1))
6526 (defun colorcomp-B-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 255 1))
6527 (defun colorcomp-R-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 0 -1))
6528 (defun colorcomp-G-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 0 -1))
6529 (defun colorcomp-B-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 0 -1))
6530
6531 (defun colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit ()
6532 "Copy the color components into the kill ring and kill the buffer.
6533 The string is formatted #RRGGBB (hash followed by six hex digits)."
6534 (interactive)
6535 (kill-new (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6536 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6537 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6538 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6539 (kill-buffer nil))
6540
6541 (setq colorcomp-mode-map
6542 (let ((m (make-sparse-keymap)))
6543 (suppress-keymap m)
6544 (define-key m "i" 'colorcomp-R-less)
6545 (define-key m "o" 'colorcomp-R-more)
6546 (define-key m "k" 'colorcomp-G-less)
6547 (define-key m "l" 'colorcomp-G-more)
6548 (define-key m "," 'colorcomp-B-less)
6549 (define-key m "." 'colorcomp-B-more)
6550 (define-key m " " 'colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit)
6551 m))
6552 @end smallexample
6553
6554 Note that we never modify the data in each node, which is fixed when the
6555 ewoc is created to be either @code{nil} or an index into the vector
6556 @code{colorcomp-data}, the actual color components.
6557
6558 @node Blinking
6559 @section Blinking Parentheses
6560 @cindex parenthesis matching
6561 @cindex blinking parentheses
6562 @cindex balancing parentheses
6563
6564 This section describes the mechanism by which Emacs shows a matching
6565 open parenthesis when the user inserts a close parenthesis.
6566
6567 @defvar blink-paren-function
6568 The value of this variable should be a function (of no arguments) to
6569 be called whenever a character with close parenthesis syntax is inserted.
6570 The value of @code{blink-paren-function} may be @code{nil}, in which
6571 case nothing is done.
6572 @end defvar
6573
6574 @defopt blink-matching-paren
6575 If this variable is @code{nil}, then @code{blink-matching-open} does
6576 nothing.
6577 @end defopt
6578
6579 @defopt blink-matching-paren-distance
6580 This variable specifies the maximum distance to scan for a matching
6581 parenthesis before giving up.
6582 @end defopt
6583
6584 @defopt blink-matching-delay
6585 This variable specifies the number of seconds to keep indicating the
6586 matching parenthesis. A fraction of a second often gives good
6587 results, but the default is 1, which works on all systems.
6588 @end defopt
6589
6590 @deffn Command blink-matching-open
6591 This function is the default value of @code{blink-paren-function}. It
6592 assumes that point follows a character with close parenthesis syntax
6593 and applies the appropriate effect momentarily to the matching opening
6594 character. If that character is not already on the screen, it
6595 displays the character's context in the echo area. To avoid long
6596 delays, this function does not search farther than
6597 @code{blink-matching-paren-distance} characters.
6598
6599 Here is an example of calling this function explicitly.
6600
6601 @smallexample
6602 @group
6603 (defun interactive-blink-matching-open ()
6604 "Indicate momentarily the start of parenthesized sexp before point."
6605 (interactive)
6606 @end group
6607 @group
6608 (let ((blink-matching-paren-distance
6609 (buffer-size))
6610 (blink-matching-paren t))
6611 (blink-matching-open)))
6612 @end group
6613 @end smallexample
6614 @end deffn
6615
6616 @node Character Display
6617 @section Character Display
6618
6619 This section describes how characters are actually displayed by
6620 Emacs. Typically, a character is displayed as a @dfn{glyph} (a
6621 graphical symbol which occupies one character position on the screen),
6622 whose appearance corresponds to the character itself. For example,
6623 the character @samp{a} (character code 97) is displayed as @samp{a}.
6624 Some characters, however, are displayed specially. For example, the
6625 formfeed character (character code 12) is usually displayed as a
6626 sequence of two glyphs, @samp{^L}, while the newline character
6627 (character code 10) starts a new screen line.
6628
6629 You can modify how each character is displayed by defining a
6630 @dfn{display table}, which maps each character code into a sequence of
6631 glyphs. @xref{Display Tables}.
6632
6633 @menu
6634 * Usual Display:: The usual conventions for displaying characters.
6635 * Display Tables:: What a display table consists of.
6636 * Active Display Table:: How Emacs selects a display table to use.
6637 * Glyphs:: How to define a glyph, and what glyphs mean.
6638 * Glyphless Chars:: How glyphless characters are drawn.
6639 @end menu
6640
6641 @node Usual Display
6642 @subsection Usual Display Conventions
6643
6644 Here are the conventions for displaying each character code (in the
6645 absence of a display table, which can override these
6646 @iftex
6647 conventions).
6648 @end iftex
6649 @ifnottex
6650 conventions; @pxref{Display Tables}).
6651 @end ifnottex
6652
6653 @cindex printable ASCII characters
6654 @itemize @bullet
6655 @item
6656 The @dfn{printable @acronym{ASCII} characters}, character codes 32
6657 through 126 (consisting of numerals, English letters, and symbols like
6658 @samp{#}) are displayed literally.
6659
6660 @item
6661 The tab character (character code 9) displays as whitespace stretching
6662 up to the next tab stop column. @xref{Text Display,,, emacs, The GNU
6663 Emacs Manual}. The variable @code{tab-width} controls the number of
6664 spaces per tab stop (see below).
6665
6666 @item
6667 The newline character (character code 10) has a special effect: it
6668 ends the preceding line and starts a new line.
6669
6670 @cindex ASCII control characters
6671 @item
6672 The non-printable @dfn{@acronym{ASCII} control characters}---character
6673 codes 0 through 31, as well as the @key{DEL} character (character code
6674 127)---display in one of two ways according to the variable
6675 @code{ctl-arrow}. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default),
6676 these characters are displayed as sequences of two glyphs, where the
6677 first glyph is @samp{^} (a display table can specify a glyph to use
6678 instead of @samp{^}); e.g., the @key{DEL} character is displayed as
6679 @samp{^?}.
6680
6681 If @code{ctl-arrow} is @code{nil}, these characters are displayed as
6682 octal escapes (see below).
6683
6684 This rule also applies to carriage return (character code 13), if that
6685 character appears in the buffer. But carriage returns usually do not
6686 appear in buffer text; they are eliminated as part of end-of-line
6687 conversion (@pxref{Coding System Basics}).
6688
6689 @cindex octal escapes
6690 @item
6691 @dfn{Raw bytes} are non-@acronym{ASCII} characters with codes 128
6692 through 255 (@pxref{Text Representations}). These characters display
6693 as @dfn{octal escapes}: sequences of four glyphs, where the first
6694 glyph is the @acronym{ASCII} code for @samp{\}, and the others are
6695 digit characters representing the character code in octal. (A display
6696 table can specify a glyph to use instead of @samp{\}.)
6697
6698 @item
6699 Each non-@acronym{ASCII} character with code above 255 is displayed
6700 literally, if the terminal supports it. If the terminal does not
6701 support it, the character is said to be @dfn{glyphless}, and it is
6702 usually displayed using a placeholder glyph. For example, if a
6703 graphical terminal has no font for a character, Emacs usually displays
6704 a box containing the character code in hexadecimal. @xref{Glyphless
6705 Chars}.
6706 @end itemize
6707
6708 The above display conventions apply even when there is a display
6709 table, for any character whose entry in the active display table is
6710 @code{nil}. Thus, when you set up a display table, you need only
6711 specify the characters for which you want special behavior.
6712
6713 The following variables affect how certain characters are displayed
6714 on the screen. Since they change the number of columns the characters
6715 occupy, they also affect the indentation functions. They also affect
6716 how the mode line is displayed; if you want to force redisplay of the
6717 mode line using the new values, call the function
6718 @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6719
6720 @defopt ctl-arrow
6721 @cindex control characters in display
6722 This buffer-local variable controls how control characters are
6723 displayed. If it is non-@code{nil}, they are displayed as a caret
6724 followed by the character: @samp{^A}. If it is @code{nil}, they are
6725 displayed as octal escapes: a backslash followed by three octal
6726 digits, as in @samp{\001}.
6727 @end defopt
6728
6729 @defopt tab-width
6730 The value of this buffer-local variable is the spacing between tab
6731 stops used for displaying tab characters in Emacs buffers. The value
6732 is in units of columns, and the default is 8. Note that this feature
6733 is completely independent of the user-settable tab stops used by the
6734 command @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. @xref{Indent Tabs}.
6735 @end defopt
6736
6737 @node Display Tables
6738 @subsection Display Tables
6739
6740 @cindex display table
6741 A display table is a special-purpose char-table
6742 (@pxref{Char-Tables}), with @code{display-table} as its subtype, which
6743 is used to override the usual character display conventions. This
6744 section describes how to make, inspect, and assign elements to a
6745 display table object.
6746
6747 @defun make-display-table
6748 This creates and returns a display table. The table initially has
6749 @code{nil} in all elements.
6750 @end defun
6751
6752 The ordinary elements of the display table are indexed by character
6753 codes; the element at index @var{c} says how to display the character
6754 code @var{c}. The value should be @code{nil} (which means to display
6755 the character @var{c} according to the usual display conventions;
6756 @pxref{Usual Display}), or a vector of glyph codes (which means to
6757 display the character @var{c} as those glyphs; @pxref{Glyphs}).
6758
6759 @strong{Warning:} if you use the display table to change the display
6760 of newline characters, the whole buffer will be displayed as one long
6761 line.
6762
6763 The display table also has six @dfn{extra slots} which serve special
6764 purposes. Here is a table of their meanings; @code{nil} in any slot
6765 means to use the default for that slot, as stated below.
6766
6767 @table @asis
6768 @item 0
6769 The glyph for the end of a truncated screen line (the default for this
6770 is @samp{$}). @xref{Glyphs}. On graphical terminals, Emacs uses
6771 arrows in the fringes to indicate truncation, so the display table has
6772 no effect.
6773
6774 @item 1
6775 The glyph for the end of a continued line (the default is @samp{\}).
6776 On graphical terminals, Emacs uses curved arrows in the fringes to
6777 indicate continuation, so the display table has no effect.
6778
6779 @item 2
6780 The glyph for indicating a character displayed as an octal character
6781 code (the default is @samp{\}).
6782
6783 @item 3
6784 The glyph for indicating a control character (the default is @samp{^}).
6785
6786 @item 4
6787 A vector of glyphs for indicating the presence of invisible lines (the
6788 default is @samp{...}). @xref{Selective Display}.
6789
6790 @item 5
6791 The glyph used to draw the border between side-by-side windows (the
6792 default is @samp{|}). @xref{Splitting Windows}. This takes effect only
6793 when there are no scroll bars; if scroll bars are supported and in use,
6794 a scroll bar separates the two windows.
6795 @end table
6796
6797 For example, here is how to construct a display table that mimics
6798 the effect of setting @code{ctl-arrow} to a non-@code{nil} value
6799 (@pxref{Glyphs}, for the function @code{make-glyph-code}):
6800
6801 @example
6802 (setq disptab (make-display-table))
6803 (dotimes (i 32)
6804 (or (= i ?\t)
6805 (= i ?\n)
6806 (aset disptab i
6807 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6808 (make-glyph-code (+ i 64) 'escape-glyph)))))
6809 (aset disptab 127
6810 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6811 (make-glyph-code ?? 'escape-glyph)))))
6812 @end example
6813
6814 @defun display-table-slot display-table slot
6815 This function returns the value of the extra slot @var{slot} of
6816 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6817 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6818 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6819 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6820 @end defun
6821
6822 @defun set-display-table-slot display-table slot value
6823 This function stores @var{value} in the extra slot @var{slot} of
6824 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6825 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6826 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6827 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6828 @end defun
6829
6830 @defun describe-display-table display-table
6831 This function displays a description of the display table
6832 @var{display-table} in a help buffer.
6833 @end defun
6834
6835 @deffn Command describe-current-display-table
6836 This command displays a description of the current display table in a
6837 help buffer.
6838 @end deffn
6839
6840 @node Active Display Table
6841 @subsection Active Display Table
6842 @cindex active display table
6843
6844 Each window can specify a display table, and so can each buffer.
6845 The window's display table, if there is one, takes precedence over the
6846 buffer's display table. If neither exists, Emacs tries to use the
6847 standard display table; if that is @code{nil}, Emacs uses the usual
6848 character display conventions (@pxref{Usual Display}).
6849
6850 Note that display tables affect how the mode line is displayed, so
6851 if you want to force redisplay of the mode line using a new display
6852 table, call @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6853
6854 @defun window-display-table &optional window
6855 This function returns @var{window}'s display table, or @code{nil} if
6856 there is none. The default for @var{window} is the selected window.
6857 @end defun
6858
6859 @defun set-window-display-table window table
6860 This function sets the display table of @var{window} to @var{table}.
6861 The argument @var{table} should be either a display table or
6862 @code{nil}.
6863 @end defun
6864
6865 @defvar buffer-display-table
6866 This variable is automatically buffer-local in all buffers; its value
6867 specifies the buffer's display table. If it is @code{nil}, there is
6868 no buffer display table.
6869 @end defvar
6870
6871 @defvar standard-display-table
6872 The value of this variable is the standard display table, which is
6873 used when Emacs is displaying a buffer in a window with neither a
6874 window display table nor a buffer display table defined, or when Emacs
6875 is outputting text to the standard output or error streams. Although its
6876 default is typically @code{nil}, in an interactive session if the
6877 terminal cannot display curved quotes, its default maps curved quotes
6878 to ASCII approximations. @xref{Keys in Documentation}.
6879 @end defvar
6880
6881 The @file{disp-table} library defines several functions for changing
6882 the standard display table.
6883
6884 @node Glyphs
6885 @subsection Glyphs
6886 @cindex glyph
6887
6888 @cindex glyph code
6889 A @dfn{glyph} is a graphical symbol which occupies a single
6890 character position on the screen. Each glyph is represented in Lisp
6891 as a @dfn{glyph code}, which specifies a character and optionally a
6892 face to display it in (@pxref{Faces}). The main use of glyph codes is
6893 as the entries of display tables (@pxref{Display Tables}). The
6894 following functions are used to manipulate glyph codes:
6895
6896 @defun make-glyph-code char &optional face
6897 This function returns a glyph code representing char @var{char} with
6898 face @var{face}. If @var{face} is omitted or @code{nil}, the glyph
6899 uses the default face; in that case, the glyph code is an integer. If
6900 @var{face} is non-@code{nil}, the glyph code is not necessarily an
6901 integer object.
6902 @end defun
6903
6904 @defun glyph-char glyph
6905 This function returns the character of glyph code @var{glyph}.
6906 @end defun
6907
6908 @defun glyph-face glyph
6909 This function returns face of glyph code @var{glyph}, or @code{nil} if
6910 @var{glyph} uses the default face.
6911 @end defun
6912
6913 @ifnottex
6914 You can set up a @dfn{glyph table} to change how glyph codes are
6915 actually displayed on text terminals. This feature is semi-obsolete;
6916 use @code{glyphless-char-display} instead (@pxref{Glyphless Chars}).
6917
6918 @defvar glyph-table
6919 The value of this variable, if non-@code{nil}, is the current glyph
6920 table. It takes effect only on character terminals; on graphical
6921 displays, all glyphs are displayed literally. The glyph table should
6922 be a vector whose @var{g}th element specifies how to display glyph
6923 code @var{g}, where @var{g} is the glyph code for a glyph whose face
6924 is unspecified. Each element should be one of the following:
6925
6926 @table @asis
6927 @item @code{nil}
6928 Display this glyph literally.
6929
6930 @item a string
6931 Display this glyph by sending the specified string to the terminal.
6932
6933 @item a glyph code
6934 Display the specified glyph code instead.
6935 @end table
6936
6937 Any integer glyph code greater than or equal to the length of the
6938 glyph table is displayed literally.
6939 @end defvar
6940 @end ifnottex
6941
6942 @node Glyphless Chars
6943 @subsection Glyphless Character Display
6944 @cindex glyphless characters
6945
6946 @dfn{Glyphless characters} are characters which are displayed in a
6947 special way, e.g., as a box containing a hexadecimal code, instead of
6948 being displayed literally. These include characters which are
6949 explicitly defined to be glyphless, as well as characters for which
6950 there is no available font (on a graphical display), and characters
6951 which cannot be encoded by the terminal's coding system (on a text
6952 terminal).
6953
6954 @defvar glyphless-char-display
6955 The value of this variable is a char-table which defines glyphless
6956 characters and how they are displayed. Each entry must be one of the
6957 following display methods:
6958
6959 @table @asis
6960 @item @code{nil}
6961 Display the character in the usual way.
6962
6963 @item @code{zero-width}
6964 Don't display the character.
6965
6966 @item @code{thin-space}
6967 Display a thin space, 1-pixel wide on graphical displays, or
6968 1-character wide on text terminals.
6969
6970 @item @code{empty-box}
6971 Display an empty box.
6972
6973 @item @code{hex-code}
6974 Display a box containing the Unicode codepoint of the character, in
6975 hexadecimal notation.
6976
6977 @item an @acronym{ASCII} string
6978 Display a box containing that string. The string should contain at
6979 most 6 @acronym{ASCII} characters.
6980
6981 @item a cons cell @code{(@var{graphical} . @var{text})}
6982 Display with @var{graphical} on graphical displays, and with
6983 @var{text} on text terminals. Both @var{graphical} and @var{text}
6984 must be one of the display methods described above.
6985 @end table
6986
6987 @noindent
6988 The @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, @code{hex-code}, and
6989 @acronym{ASCII} string display methods are drawn with the
6990 @code{glyphless-char} face. On text terminals, a box is emulated by
6991 square brackets, @samp{[]}.
6992
6993 The char-table has one extra slot, which determines how to display any
6994 character that cannot be displayed with any available font, or cannot
6995 be encoded by the terminal's coding system. Its value should be one
6996 of the above display methods, except @code{zero-width} or a cons cell.
6997
6998 If a character has a non-@code{nil} entry in an active display table,
6999 the display table takes effect; in this case, Emacs does not consult
7000 @code{glyphless-char-display} at all.
7001 @end defvar
7002
7003 @defopt glyphless-char-display-control
7004 This user option provides a convenient way to set
7005 @code{glyphless-char-display} for groups of similar characters. Do
7006 not set its value directly from Lisp code; the value takes effect only
7007 via a custom @code{:set} function (@pxref{Variable Definitions}),
7008 which updates @code{glyphless-char-display}.
7009
7010 Its value should be an alist of elements @code{(@var{group}
7011 . @var{method})}, where @var{group} is a symbol specifying a group of
7012 characters, and @var{method} is a symbol specifying how to display
7013 them.
7014
7015 @var{group} should be one of the following:
7016
7017 @table @code
7018 @item c0-control
7019 @acronym{ASCII} control characters @code{U+0000} to @code{U+001F},
7020 excluding the newline and tab characters (normally displayed as escape
7021 sequences like @samp{^A}; @pxref{Text Display,, How Text Is Displayed,
7022 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
7023
7024 @item c1-control
7025 Non-@acronym{ASCII}, non-printing characters @code{U+0080} to
7026 @code{U+009F} (normally displayed as octal escape sequences like
7027 @samp{\230}).
7028
7029 @item format-control
7030 Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as @samp{U+200E}
7031 (Left-to-Right Mark), but excluding characters that have graphic
7032 images, such as @samp{U+00AD} (Soft Hyphen).
7033
7034 @item no-font
7035 Characters for there is no suitable font, or which cannot be encoded
7036 by the terminal's coding system.
7037 @end table
7038
7039 @c FIXME: this can also be 'acronym', but that's not currently
7040 @c completely implemented; it applies only to the format-control
7041 @c group, and only works if the acronym is in 'char-acronym-table'.
7042 The @var{method} symbol should be one of @code{zero-width},
7043 @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, or @code{hex-code}. These have
7044 the same meanings as in @code{glyphless-char-display}, above.
7045 @end defopt
7046
7047 @node Beeping
7048 @section Beeping
7049 @cindex bell
7050
7051 This section describes how to make Emacs ring the bell (or blink the
7052 screen) to attract the user's attention. Be conservative about how
7053 often you do this; frequent bells can become irritating. Also be
7054 careful not to use just beeping when signaling an error is more
7055 appropriate (@pxref{Errors}).
7056
7057 @defun ding &optional do-not-terminate
7058 @cindex keyboard macro termination
7059 This function beeps, or flashes the screen (see @code{visible-bell} below).
7060 It also terminates any keyboard macro currently executing unless
7061 @var{do-not-terminate} is non-@code{nil}.
7062 @end defun
7063
7064 @defun beep &optional do-not-terminate
7065 This is a synonym for @code{ding}.
7066 @end defun
7067
7068 @defopt visible-bell
7069 This variable determines whether Emacs should flash the screen to
7070 represent a bell. Non-@code{nil} means yes, @code{nil} means no.
7071 This is effective on graphical displays, and on text terminals
7072 provided the terminal's Termcap entry defines the visible bell
7073 capability (@samp{vb}).
7074 @end defopt
7075
7076 @defopt ring-bell-function
7077 If this is non-@code{nil}, it specifies how Emacs should ring the
7078 bell. Its value should be a function of no arguments. If this is
7079 non-@code{nil}, it takes precedence over the @code{visible-bell}
7080 variable.
7081 @end defopt
7082
7083 @node Window Systems
7084 @section Window Systems
7085
7086 Emacs works with several window systems, most notably the X Window
7087 System. Both Emacs and X use the term ``window'', but use it
7088 differently. An Emacs frame is a single window as far as X is
7089 concerned; the individual Emacs windows are not known to X at all.
7090
7091 @defvar window-system
7092 This terminal-local variable tells Lisp programs what window system
7093 Emacs is using for displaying the frame. The possible values are
7094
7095 @table @code
7096 @item x
7097 @cindex X Window System
7098 Emacs is displaying the frame using X.
7099 @item w32
7100 Emacs is displaying the frame using native MS-Windows GUI.
7101 @item ns
7102 Emacs is displaying the frame using the Nextstep interface (used on
7103 GNUstep and Mac OS X).
7104 @item pc
7105 Emacs is displaying the frame using MS-DOS direct screen writes.
7106 @item nil
7107 Emacs is displaying the frame on a character-based terminal.
7108 @end table
7109 @end defvar
7110
7111 @defvar initial-window-system
7112 This variable holds the value of @code{window-system} used for the
7113 first frame created by Emacs during startup. (When Emacs is invoked
7114 with the @option{--daemon} option, it does not create any initial
7115 frames, so @code{initial-window-system} is @code{nil}, except on
7116 MS-Windows, where it is still @code{w32}. @xref{Initial Options,
7117 daemon,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
7118 @end defvar
7119
7120 @defun window-system &optional frame
7121 This function returns a symbol whose name tells what window system is
7122 used for displaying @var{frame} (which defaults to the currently
7123 selected frame). The list of possible symbols it returns is the same
7124 one documented for the variable @code{window-system} above.
7125 @end defun
7126
7127 Do @emph{not} use @code{window-system} and
7128 @code{initial-window-system} as predicates or boolean flag variables,
7129 if you want to write code that works differently on text terminals and
7130 graphic displays. That is because @code{window-system} is not a good
7131 indicator of Emacs capabilities on a given display type. Instead, use
7132 @code{display-graphic-p} or any of the other @code{display-*-p}
7133 predicates described in @ref{Display Feature Testing}.
7134
7135 @node Tooltips
7136 @section Tooltips
7137 @cindex tooltips
7138 @dfn{Tooltips} are special frames (@pxref{Frames}) that are used to
7139 display helpful hints (a.k.a.@: ``tips'') related to the current
7140 position of the mouse pointer. Emacs uses tooltips to display help
7141 strings about active portions of text (@pxref{Special Properties}) and
7142 about various UI elements, such as menu items (@pxref{Extended Menu
7143 Items}) and tool-bar buttons (@pxref{Tool Bar}).
7144
7145 @defun tooltip-mode
7146 Tooltip Mode is a minor mode that enables display of tooltips.
7147 Turning off this mode causes the tooltips be displayed in the echo
7148 area. On text-mode (a.k.a.@: ``TTY'') frames, tooltips are always
7149 displayed in the echo area.
7150 @end defun
7151
7152 @vindex x-gtk-use-system-tooltips
7153 When Emacs is built with GTK+ support, it by default displays tooltips
7154 using GTK+ functions, and the appearance of the tooltips is then
7155 controlled by GTK+ settings. GTK+ tooltips can be disabled by
7156 changing the value of the variable @code{x-gtk-use-system-tooltips} to
7157 @code{nil}. The rest of this subsection describes how to control
7158 non-GTK+ tooltips, which are presented by Emacs itself.
7159
7160 Since tooltips are special frames, they have their frame parameters
7161 (@pxref{Frame Parameters}). Unlike other frames, the frame parameters
7162 for tooltips are stored in a special variable.
7163
7164 @defvar tooltip-frame-parameters
7165 This customizable option holds the frame parameters used for
7166 displaying tooltips. Any font and color parameters are ignored, and
7167 the corresponding attributes of the @code{tooltip} face are used
7168 instead. If @code{left} or @code{top} parameters are included, they
7169 are used as absolute frame-relative coordinates where the tooltip
7170 should be shown. (Mouse-relative position of the tooltip can be
7171 customized using the variables described in @ref{Tooltips,,, emacs,
7172 The GNU Emacs Manual}.) Note that the @code{left} and @code{top}
7173 parameters, if present, override the values of mouse-relative offsets.
7174 @end defvar
7175
7176 @vindex tooltip@r{ face}
7177 The @code{tooltip} face determines the appearance of text shown in
7178 tooltips. It should generally use a variable-pitch font of size that
7179 is preferably smaller than the default frame font.
7180
7181 @findex tooltip-help-tips
7182 @defvar tooltip-functions
7183 This abnormal hook is a list of functions to call when Emacs needs to
7184 display a tooltip. Each function is called with a single argument
7185 @var{event} which is a copy of the last mouse movement event. If a
7186 function on this list actually displays the tooltip, it should return
7187 non-@code{nil}, and then the rest of the functions will not be
7188 called. The default value of this variable is a single function
7189 @code{tooltip-help-tips}.
7190 @end defvar
7191
7192 If you write your own function to be put on the
7193 @code{tooltip-functions} list, you may need to know the buffer of the
7194 mouse event that triggered the tooltip display. The following
7195 function provides that information.
7196
7197 @defun tooltip-event-buffer event
7198 This function returns the buffer over which @var{event} occurred.
7199 Call it with the argument of the function from
7200 @code{tooltip-functions} to obtain the buffer whose text triggered the
7201 tooltip. Note that the event might occur not over a buffer (e.g.,
7202 over the tool bar), in which case this function will return
7203 @code{nil}.
7204 @end defun
7205
7206 Other aspects of tooltip display are controlled by several
7207 customizable settings; see @ref{Tooltips,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
7208 Manual}.
7209
7210 @node Bidirectional Display
7211 @section Bidirectional Display
7212 @cindex bidirectional display
7213 @cindex right-to-left text
7214
7215 Emacs can display text written in scripts, such as Arabic, Farsi,
7216 and Hebrew, whose natural ordering for horizontal text display runs
7217 from right to left. Furthermore, segments of Latin script and digits
7218 embedded in right-to-left text are displayed left-to-right, while
7219 segments of right-to-left script embedded in left-to-right text
7220 (e.g., Arabic or Hebrew text in comments or strings in a program
7221 source file) are appropriately displayed right-to-left. We call such
7222 mixtures of left-to-right and right-to-left text @dfn{bidirectional
7223 text}. This section describes the facilities and options for editing
7224 and displaying bidirectional text.
7225
7226 @cindex logical order
7227 @cindex reading order
7228 @cindex visual order
7229 @cindex unicode bidirectional algorithm
7230 @cindex UBA
7231 @cindex bidirectional reordering
7232 @cindex reordering, of bidirectional text
7233 Text is stored in Emacs buffers and strings in @dfn{logical} (or
7234 @dfn{reading}) order, i.e., the order in which a human would read
7235 each character. In right-to-left and bidirectional text, the order in
7236 which characters are displayed on the screen (called @dfn{visual
7237 order}) is not the same as logical order; the characters' screen
7238 positions do not increase monotonically with string or buffer
7239 position. In performing this @dfn{bidirectional reordering}, Emacs
7240 follows the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (a.k.a.@: @acronym{UBA}),
7241 which is described in Annex #9 of the Unicode standard
7242 (@url{http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr9/}). Emacs provides a ``Full
7243 Bidirectionality'' class implementation of the @acronym{UBA},
7244 consistent with the requirements of the Unicode Standard v8.0.
7245
7246 @defvar bidi-display-reordering
7247 If the value of this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil} (the
7248 default), Emacs performs bidirectional reordering for display. The
7249 reordering affects buffer text, as well as display strings and overlay
7250 strings from text and overlay properties in the buffer (@pxref{Overlay
7251 Properties}, and @pxref{Display Property}). If the value is
7252 @code{nil}, Emacs does not perform bidirectional reordering in the
7253 buffer.
7254
7255 The default value of @code{bidi-display-reordering} controls the
7256 reordering of strings which are not directly supplied by a buffer,
7257 including the text displayed in mode lines (@pxref{Mode Line Format})
7258 and header lines (@pxref{Header Lines}).
7259 @end defvar
7260
7261 @cindex unibyte buffers, and bidi reordering
7262 Emacs never reorders the text of a unibyte buffer, even if
7263 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is non-@code{nil} in the buffer. This
7264 is because unibyte buffers contain raw bytes, not characters, and thus
7265 lack the directionality properties required for reordering.
7266 Therefore, to test whether text in a buffer will be reordered for
7267 display, it is not enough to test the value of
7268 @code{bidi-display-reordering} alone. The correct test is this:
7269
7270 @example
7271 (if (and enable-multibyte-characters
7272 bidi-display-reordering)
7273 ;; Buffer is being reordered for display
7274 )
7275 @end example
7276
7277 However, unibyte display and overlay strings @emph{are} reordered if
7278 their parent buffer is reordered. This is because plain-@sc{ascii}
7279 strings are stored by Emacs as unibyte strings. If a unibyte display
7280 or overlay string includes non-@sc{ascii} characters, these characters
7281 are assumed to have left-to-right direction.
7282
7283 @cindex display properties, and bidi reordering of text
7284 Text covered by @code{display} text properties, by overlays with
7285 @code{display} properties whose value is a string, and by any other
7286 properties that replace buffer text, is treated as a single unit when
7287 it is reordered for display. That is, the entire chunk of text
7288 covered by these properties is reordered together. Moreover, the
7289 bidirectional properties of the characters in such a chunk of text are
7290 ignored, and Emacs reorders them as if they were replaced with a
7291 single character @code{U+FFFC}, known as the @dfn{Object Replacement
7292 Character}. This means that placing a display property over a portion
7293 of text may change the way that the surrounding text is reordered for
7294 display. To prevent this unexpected effect, always place such
7295 properties on text whose directionality is identical with text that
7296 surrounds it.
7297
7298 @cindex base direction of a paragraph
7299 Each paragraph of bidirectional text has a @dfn{base direction},
7300 either right-to-left or left-to-right. Left-to-right paragraphs are
7301 displayed beginning at the left margin of the window, and are
7302 truncated or continued when the text reaches the right margin.
7303 Right-to-left paragraphs are displayed beginning at the right margin,
7304 and are continued or truncated at the left margin.
7305
7306 By default, Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph by
7307 looking at the text at its beginning. The precise method of
7308 determining the base direction is specified by the @acronym{UBA}; in a
7309 nutshell, the first character in a paragraph that has an explicit
7310 directionality determines the base direction of the paragraph.
7311 However, sometimes a buffer may need to force a certain base direction
7312 for its paragraphs. For example, buffers containing program source
7313 code should force all paragraphs to be displayed left-to-right. You
7314 can use following variable to do this:
7315
7316 @defvar bidi-paragraph-direction
7317 If the value of this buffer-local variable is the symbol
7318 @code{right-to-left} or @code{left-to-right}, all paragraphs in the
7319 buffer are assumed to have that specified direction. Any other value
7320 is equivalent to @code{nil} (the default), which means to determine
7321 the base direction of each paragraph from its contents.
7322
7323 @cindex @code{prog-mode}, and @code{bidi-paragraph-direction}
7324 Modes for program source code should set this to @code{left-to-right}.
7325 Prog mode does this by default, so modes derived from Prog mode do not
7326 need to set this explicitly (@pxref{Basic Major Modes}).
7327 @end defvar
7328
7329 @defun current-bidi-paragraph-direction &optional buffer
7330 This function returns the paragraph direction at point in the named
7331 @var{buffer}. The returned value is a symbol, either
7332 @code{left-to-right} or @code{right-to-left}. If @var{buffer} is
7333 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current buffer. If the
7334 buffer-local value of the variable @code{bidi-paragraph-direction} is
7335 non-@code{nil}, the returned value will be identical to that value;
7336 otherwise, the returned value reflects the paragraph direction
7337 determined dynamically by Emacs. For buffers whose value of
7338 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is @code{nil} as well as unibyte
7339 buffers, this function always returns @code{left-to-right}.
7340 @end defun
7341
7342 @cindex visual-order cursor motion
7343 Sometimes there's a need to move point in strict visual order,
7344 either to the left or to the right of its current screen position.
7345 Emacs provides a primitive to do that.
7346
7347 @defun move-point-visually direction
7348 This function moves point of the currently selected window to the
7349 buffer position that appears immediately to the right or to the left
7350 of point on the screen. If @var{direction} is positive, point will
7351 move one screen position to the right, otherwise it will move one
7352 screen position to the left. Note that, depending on the surrounding
7353 bidirectional context, this could potentially move point many buffer
7354 positions away. If invoked at the end of a screen line, the function
7355 moves point to the rightmost or leftmost screen position of the next
7356 or previous screen line, as appropriate for the value of
7357 @var{direction}.
7358
7359 The function returns the new buffer position as its value.
7360 @end defun
7361
7362 @cindex layout on display, and bidirectional text
7363 @cindex jumbled display of bidirectional text
7364 @cindex concatenating bidirectional strings
7365 Bidirectional reordering can have surprising and unpleasant effects
7366 when two strings with bidirectional content are juxtaposed in a
7367 buffer, or otherwise programmatically concatenated into a string of
7368 text. A typical problematic case is when a buffer consists of
7369 sequences of text fields separated by whitespace or punctuation
7370 characters, like Buffer Menu mode or Rmail Summary Mode. Because the
7371 punctuation characters used as separators have @dfn{weak
7372 directionality}, they take on the directionality of surrounding text.
7373 As result, a numeric field that follows a field with bidirectional
7374 content can be displayed @emph{to the left} of the preceding field,
7375 messing up the expected layout. There are several ways to avoid this
7376 problem:
7377
7378 @itemize @minus
7379 @item
7380 Append the special character @code{U+200E}, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, or
7381 @acronym{LRM}, to the end of each field that may have bidirectional
7382 content, or prepend it to the beginning of the following field. The
7383 function @code{bidi-string-mark-left-to-right}, described below, comes
7384 in handy for this purpose. (In a right-to-left paragraph, use
7385 @code{U+200F}, RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK, or @acronym{RLM}, instead.) This
7386 is one of the solutions recommended by the UBA.
7387
7388 @item
7389 Include the tab character in the field separator. The tab character
7390 plays the role of @dfn{segment separator} in bidirectional reordering,
7391 causing the text on either side to be reordered separately.
7392
7393 @cindex @code{space} display spec, and bidirectional text
7394 @item
7395 Separate fields with a @code{display} property or overlay with a
7396 property value of the form @code{(space . PROPS)} (@pxref{Specified
7397 Space}). Emacs treats this display specification as a @dfn{paragraph
7398 separator}, and reorders the text on either side separately.
7399 @end itemize
7400
7401 @defun bidi-string-mark-left-to-right string
7402 This function returns its argument @var{string}, possibly modified,
7403 such that the result can be safely concatenated with another string,
7404 or juxtaposed with another string in a buffer, without disrupting the
7405 relative layout of this string and the next one on display. If the
7406 string returned by this function is displayed as part of a
7407 left-to-right paragraph, it will always appear on display to the left
7408 of the text that follows it. The function works by examining the
7409 characters of its argument, and if any of those characters could cause
7410 reordering on display, the function appends the @acronym{LRM}
7411 character to the string. The appended @acronym{LRM} character is made
7412 invisible by giving it an @code{invisible} text property of @code{t}
7413 (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
7414 @end defun
7415
7416 The reordering algorithm uses the bidirectional properties of the
7417 characters stored as their @code{bidi-class} property
7418 (@pxref{Character Properties}). Lisp programs can change these
7419 properties by calling the @code{put-char-code-property} function.
7420 However, doing this requires a thorough understanding of the
7421 @acronym{UBA}, and is therefore not recommended. Any changes to the
7422 bidirectional properties of a character have global effect: they
7423 affect all Emacs frames and windows.
7424
7425 Similarly, the @code{mirroring} property is used to display the
7426 appropriate mirrored character in the reordered text. Lisp programs
7427 can affect the mirrored display by changing this property. Again, any
7428 such changes affect all of Emacs display.
7429
7430 @cindex overriding bidirectional properties
7431 @cindex directional overrides
7432 @cindex LRO
7433 @cindex RLO
7434 The bidirectional properties of characters can be overridden by
7435 inserting into the text special directional control characters,
7436 LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE (@acronym{LRO}) and RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE
7437 (@acronym{RLO}). Any characters between a @acronym{RLO} and the
7438 following newline or POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING (@acronym{PDF})
7439 control character, whichever comes first, will be displayed as if they
7440 were strong right-to-left characters, i.e.@: they will be reversed on
7441 display. Similarly, any characters between @acronym{LRO} and
7442 @acronym{PDF} or newline will display as if they were strong
7443 left-to-right, and will @emph{not} be reversed even if they are strong
7444 right-to-left characters.
7445
7446 @cindex phishing using directional overrides
7447 @cindex malicious use of directional overrides
7448 These overrides are useful when you want to make some text
7449 unaffected by the reordering algorithm, and instead directly control
7450 the display order. But they can also be used for malicious purposes,
7451 known as @dfn{phishing}. Specifically, a URL on a Web page or a link
7452 in an email message can be manipulated to make its visual appearance
7453 unrecognizable, or similar to some popular benign location, while the
7454 real location, interpreted by a browser in the logical order, is very
7455 different.
7456
7457 Emacs provides a primitive that applications can use to detect
7458 instances of text whose bidirectional properties were overridden so as
7459 to make a left-to-right character display as if it were a
7460 right-to-left character, or vise versa.
7461
7462 @defun bidi-find-overridden-directionality from to &optional object
7463 This function looks at the text of the specified @var{object} between
7464 positions @var{from} (inclusive) and @var{to} (exclusive), and returns
7465 the first position where it finds a strong left-to-right character
7466 whose directional properties were forced to display the character as
7467 right-to-left, or for a strong right-to-left character that was forced
7468 to display as left-to-right. If it finds no such characters in the
7469 specified region of text, it returns @code{nil}.
7470
7471 The optional argument @var{object} specifies which text to search, and
7472 defaults to the current buffer. If @var{object} is non-@code{nil}, it
7473 can be some other buffer, or it can be a string or a window. If it is
7474 a string, the function searches that string. If it is a window, the
7475 function searches the buffer displayed in that window. If a buffer
7476 whose text you want to examine is displayed in some window, we
7477 recommend to specify it by that window, rather than pass the buffer to
7478 the function. This is because telling the function about the window
7479 allows it to correctly account for window-specific overlays, which
7480 might change the result of the function if some text in the buffer is
7481 covered by overlays.
7482 @end defun
7483
7484 @cindex copying bidirectional text, preserve visual order
7485 @cindex visual order, preserve when copying bidirectional text
7486 When text that includes mixed right-to-left and left-to-right
7487 characters and bidirectional controls is copied into a different
7488 location, it can change its visual appearance, and also can affect the
7489 visual appearance of the surrounding text at destination. This is
7490 because reordering of bidirectional text specified by the
7491 @acronym{UBA} has non-trivial context-dependent effects both on the
7492 copied text and on the text at copy destination that will surround it.
7493
7494 Sometimes, a Lisp program may need to preserve the exact visual
7495 appearance of the copied text at destination, and of the text that
7496 surrounds the copy. Lisp programs can use the following function to
7497 achieve that effect.
7498
7499 @defun buffer-substring-with-bidi-context start end &optional no-properties
7500 This function works similar to @code{buffer-substring} (@pxref{Buffer
7501 Contents}), but it prepends and appends to the copied text bidi
7502 directional control characters necessary to preserve the visual
7503 appearance of the text when it is inserted at another place. Optional
7504 argument @var{no-properties}, if non-@code{nil}, means remove the text
7505 properties from the copy of the text.
7506 @end defun